

A WIRING MANUAL 



With this Wiring Manual you will 
be able to quickly locate and repair 
faulty circuits, generators, starting 
motors, batteries, coils, controllers, 
switches, etc., relating to all electric 
systems on all cars from 1912. 

There are 680 pages showing the 
wiring diagrams of 550 cars and 175 in¬ 
ternal diagrams—or over 700 diagrams 
in all-and blue prints. 

Hundreds of cars must be re-wired 
because of oil soaked and worn out 
insulation. The job is difficult unless 

te this course 
tow to wire a 

to know more 


car from these diag 
about it. Price, $12. 


We D 
Also Repair C 

It is impossible to 
out. Quite often th< 
testing, we find magi 
thing quite different, 
together with staterm 
ation and we will tes 


Glass_ ~ Tb )4£T 


‘9 

ng Motors 

out first testing 
;ctive, but after 
points, or some- 

; to us prepaid, 

it acts in oper- 
h the work. 


Subs 

T 

We offer you a i 
140 pages. 

It is a practical p; 
Several pages of ( 
Practical hints an 


Book_ 



COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. 


le 

average, about 

nd illustrations. 
3 of subscribers. 


FILL 


Gentlemen: Enclosed find $_, for which send me tor one year, without 

further cost to me, the Automobile Trade Magazine which you recommend. 


Name_ 

Address. 


(write plain) 


Street_State_ 

SUBSCRIPTION PRICE 

Price, $1.50 per year in all states, except Arizona, Calif., Colo., Idaho, Kans., Mont., Nebr., 
Nevada, New Mekico, N. Dakota, S. Dakota, Okla., Oregon, Utah, Washin., Wyoming. In these 
states the subscription price is $2.00. Subscription price for Canada $1.50. 

Address A. L. Dyke, Publishers, Granite Bldg., St. Louis, Mo. 


























TL 145 
. D98 
Copy ^ 


Examination 
Questions • 

FOR 

Dyke’s Home Study Course 

OF 

Automobile Engineering 

o o 


By 

A.‘ L. DYKE 

Assisted by Mr. A. W. Rhein 


Copyrighted 1919 

By 

A. L. DYKE, St. Louis, Mo. 


Published by 

A. L. DYKE, Publisher 
ST. LOUIS, MO., U. S. A. 



II 


Preface. 



One of the Chief Advantages of Dyke’s Home Study Course of Automobile 
Engineering is in the Examination Questions. The student answers the examina¬ 
tion questions by writing them down. 


Even though you do nothing more than copy the answers to the questions and 
write them down, you would learn more than you would by merely reading a 
book, because you would memorize the answers to the principal points (or, just 
what you ought to know) while writing. 


It will be to your advantage, however, to write the answers from memory, 
after studying each instruction. 

These questions are especially prepared in order to bring out the principal 
features of each subject, and if the questions are answered seriatim you will 
advance step by step, in a progressive, accumulative manner, as you should. 


The Models. 


These models are made solely for instruction purposes. They are of no value 

otherwise. Wait until you are into the subjects of engine valves, valve timing, 
firing orders, etc., and you will then begin to appreciate their real value. 


A Few Practical Pointers You Should Always 

J 

Remember. 


THINK before you ACT. There is 
no profession today which one should 
take more pains to cultivate the habit 
of thinking first—before acting, than 
the profession of an automobile repair¬ 
man and a surgeon. A surgeon might 
operate on a person for something that 
did not require operation—if he acted 
before thinking—and just so with the 
automobile repairman. 

Remember that most bolts and nuts 
have right-handed threads, some have 
left-handed threads; if so, it is there for 
a purpose—THINK. 

Remember that a large monkey 
wrench on a small nut may result in 
breaking something, as the leverage is 
much greater. 

Remember that bolts and nuts of the 
same size may look alike, but may have 
different threads. To “cross thread” a 
nut on a bolt is an unpardonable sin. 

Remember that pliers are not in¬ 
tended to be used where a wrench is 

APR 


supposed to be used. They are made 
for different work. 

Remember that all parts are intended 
to fit in place easily and are not to be 
forced. 

Remember that all nuts should be 
drawn snug, but also remember that 
many a water manifold flange has been 
cracked by drawing the nut too tight. 
I could continue with this kind of ad¬ 
vice for many pages more, but it is not 
necessary as you now know what I mean 
by Thinking Before You Act—don’t you 
think so? 

Remember that when you remove 
parts of an engine, if these parts are 
replaced wrong—well, you know the 
answer. Ad.opt some system of working 
and have a box or pan for each lot of 
parts. 

Remember that order and system is 
the first step to success and spells effi¬ 
ciency, and efficiency saves dollars. If 
you don’t know the full meaning of 
these two words, find a dictionary ant\ 
learn the meaning right now. 

25 !9I9 ©Cl.A525261 


< * 



>h£x<,' 


III 


Instructions to the 
Student. 



Vour enrollment number is stamped in this square i tw 


WHEN WRITING OR ANSWERING QUESTIONS, PUT YOUR NAME, 
ADDRESS AND THIS ENROLLMENT NUMBER, ALSO YOUR INSTRUCTION 
NUMBER AT THE TOP OF EACH INSTRUCTION PAGE. DON’T FAIL TO DO 
THIS, OTHERWISE YOUR PAPERS WILL BE DELAYED. 

Send in answers to the following instructions at one time, thus dividing the 
Questions in four sections: Instructions 1 to 15; 16 to 33; 34 to 43; 44 to 49, and 
be sure to prepay postage in full, otherwise papers may be lost (see subject on 
postage). You are at liberty to send in answers to all of the lessons at one time 
if you so desire. But don’t send answers to a single instruction.. 

You may take as long a time as you wish, up to one year after date of 
enrollment, to answer the questions. 

Write on plain paper, light weight as possible, and with ink or typewriter. 
Be sure and put your name, address, etc., as per above. 

In order to answer the questions intelligently, make a careful study of the 
Instructions, and when ybu feel fairly sure that you understand, try to answer the 
questions without assistance. Answer as many as possible without referring to 
instruction, only using it for further study when it is absolutely necessary. 

Each Instruction must be thoroughly understood before proceeding to the 
next. My advice is to read the instruction through and learn the names of all 
the parts, and then study and answer the questions on going over it the second 
time. 

We do not expect every word and sentence to be absolutely correct; we 
simply want to know that you understand the principle or the idea—that’s all. 

The first few instructions are for the man who never saw the inside of an 
automobile, yet the most expert will find valuable information on practically 
every point touched. When you get to No. 7 lesson you will find every word of 
growing interest and value. 

You can’t judge the Course by looking it over, get into the reading matter. 

Dictionary and Index: It is advisable for the student to refer to both, where 
words and terms are not clear. 

Don’t get in a hurry, take time, cultivate patience, set a time to do this work 
and concentrate on it properly and you will be well rewarded in the long run. 



Name and Address- - --— 

Enrollment No.- Instruction No.— 


How to Answer the 
Examination 



Don’t write the question, merely the answer, but be 
sure and put the number of question down. 


Light Weight Paper to 
Save Postage. 


Get a five or ten-cent writing tablet and rule it up 
as shown in the illustration—but be sure to get light 
weight paper. 


Also note that name and address, enrollment num¬ 
ber and instruction number should appear at the top of 
each instruction sheet. 


Don’t send in answers to less than one section (not 
one instruction) at a time. (See “Instructions to Stu¬ 
dents.”) 










IV 


If You Ask Questions 

It will save considerable time and make the question 
easier to answer, and for you to understand the answer— if you will oblige us 
by asking one question at the time, and place a number before the question, as, 
Question No. 1; then leave space for the answer to be written. Another point 
to observe in asking questions is, that you ask for the answer on that part of the 
subject you don’t understand. Don’t ask us to answer all of the question when 
it is answered in the text book, probably much clearer than we could answer it 
by a letter. Make an effort to answer it yourself and then, if you must, ask the 
question on the part which bothers you. These questions are for you to answer— 
not us. * 

If you don’t answer some of the questions but leave it blank, we will assume 
that you did not look it up and it will be returned to you unanswered by us. If the 
answer cannot be found, refer to the index and text book. 


A Few Words About Postage. 

In sending answers to the questions, prepay full postage. Please include 
postage for return of your Examination papers. 

We have cautioned our students many times about writing on heavy paper— 
some do this, and put only a 2c stamp on same, and we are compelled to pay 
sometimes, as high as 20c for one set of answers which are sent in, written on 
heavy paper. 

While this small amount does not amount to much on one letter—it does 
amount to a considerable sum where we get several hundred per month. For 
instance, if we receive a hundred per day and pay 2c and 4c postage dues on the 
100, it costs us $2.00 to $4.00 per day, and because our students write on heavy 
paper and do not pay sufficient postage. At the low price we sell our course and 
the time we devote to your papers leaves a very small margin of profit. 

Note:—In sending in final answers include 12c for postage to cover mailing 
the Diploma. 

Don’t send postage of foreign countries as it cannot be used in this country. 
Send P. O. order payable in the U. S, 


A Binder for Keeping Your 
Examination Papers. 

Please note before reading this: you don’t abso¬ 
lutely have to have this binder and special examina¬ 
tion paper; you can use a 5 or 10c writing tablet, 
but inasmuch as many of our students have re¬ 
quested something of the kind, we have prepared 
special paper and binder at a small additional cost. 



The special examination paper is printed and 
ruled as shown in the illustration. 

I would advise that every' student keep his 
answers in such a manner that he can refer to them 


Price for Binder, Paper, Spe¬ 
cial Envelopes, prepaid,$i,00 

Note: Binder now opens 

from the end instead of the 
side. 

from time to time. 


With the binder you will have your examination papers in nice shape where 
you can keep them indefinitely and refer to them easily. 

When you get actually into the business of repairing or operating a car, you 
will, no doubt, have occasion to refer to various subjects. 













1 


QUESTIONS TO INSTRUCTION No. 1. 

The Automobile—General Assembly. 

. (See index for subjects, if not fully covered on pages given.) 

question Page 

1 How many systems of propulsion are there in general use?.10 

2— Which is the most popular, and why?.10 

3— What are the two distinct parts of a car?.10 

4— What part of a car is the chassis?.10 

5— What part of a car is the running gear?.10, 11 

6— What part of a car is the power plant?.10 

7— What part of a car is the transmission system?.10 

8— What part of a car is the control system?. .10 

9— Explain the purpose of a main frame and sub-frame.11 

10— What purpose do the front wheels serve besides supporting the load?.11 

11— How are the power plants suspended and where located?.11 

12— What purpose does the engine serve?.11 

13— What purpose does the transmission serve?.12 

14— How is the transmission connected with the engine?.12 

15— What is placed between the engine and transmission, and why?.12 

15a-Explain the purpose of a clutch.12 

16— What is a drive shaft .for, and where is it locate'd?.13, 19 

17— How is the drive shaft connected with transmission?.13, 19 

18— Why is a universal joint necessary, and how constructed?.13, 19, 43 

19— What does the rear end of drive shaft connect with?.13 

20— What is a drive pinion, and what does it connect with?.13, 19 

21— What is the bevel gear (also called ring gear) used for on a differential?._13 

22— How is the bevel gear connected with the axle?.13, 34 

23— Why is a differential necessary?.13 

24— What are wheels made of, and why smaller than horse-drawn vehicles?.15 

25— Why is a tail, or rear light necessary on an automobile?.17 

26— What is the difference between a speedometer and an odometer?.17 

27— What does wheel base mean?.17 

28— What is meant by the tread?.17 

29— What is meant by the clearance of a car?.17 

INSTRUCTION No. 2. 

Drive Methods. 

1— How many methods are there for driving a car?.18 

2— What is meant by a double chain drive?.18 

3— Explain how an engine can drive a car with double chains, and how would the 

power be transmitted to the rear axle?.18, 20 

4— What purpose does the jack shaft serve?.18, 20 

5 — How is the differential used in connection with a double chain-driven car, and 

where placed?.29 

6— What type of chain is in most common use?.18, 749 

7 — How is the slack taken up when worn?.19 

7a-What is meant by “a silent chain,” and where is it used?.21,728 

8— What are the advantages and disadvantages of chain drive, and what type of 

drive is now generally used on trucks?..19, 747 

9 — How does the engine drive a car with a single chain drive, and where is differ¬ 
ential placed?.^9, 20 










































2 


10— What is the modern method of driving a rear axle?.19, 747 

11— What purpose does a propeller shaft or driving shaft serve?.19 

12— What is the drive pinion, and what does it connect with?.19, 35 

13— Could the drive pinion and differential ring gear have spiral bevel teeth as wpll 

as straight bevel teeth?.21, 35 

14— What is the worm gear and worm wheel?.21, 35 

15— Can the worm be placed under the worm wheel as well as over it?.21, 35 

16— Explain the meaning of drive reduction.22 

16a-What is meant by “gear-ratio”?.22,781 

16b-How could the “gear-ratio” be changed on a Ford, (as an example)?.781 

17— What is a torsion rod for?.22 

17a-What is the meaning of the word torque?.22, 864 

18— What is a radius or distance rod for?...20, 21 

18a-Explain what is meant by “Hotchkiss” drive.22 

19— What kind of a gear is a spur gear?...21, 25 

20— What kind of a gear is a bevel gear?.21, 25 - 

21— What is the advantage of a “helical” gear over a “straight tooth” gear?.. .35, 21 

INSTRUCTION No. 3. 

Steering, Springs, Brakes. 

1— How are the front wheels of an automobile controlled?.23 

2— What purpose does steering knuckles serve, and where placed?.25 

3— Name the different types of steering devices.25,692 

4— How is a steering device connected with the front wheels so they can be 

controlled by the steering wheel?.24 

5— Name the types of springs in general use.27 

6— Which is the most popular type of rear spring?.27 

7— What is the proper method of lubricating the springs?.27, 749, 559 

8— Why are shock absorbers used on a car?. 27 

9— Name the different types, and where located.27 

10— Where are brakes usually placed on a car?.29, 685 

11— Name the two types in general use.29, 685 

12— Explain the action of the foot brake, and where located.29, 685 

12a-Explain the action of the hand brake, and where located.. v ..29, 685 

13— Is the foot brake the external or internal brake on rear axle brake drum?.29, 685 

14— Are the band brakes single or double acting?.29, 30 

15— Explain the difference between the “double acting” and “single acting” 

brake.29, 30 

16— What is a brake equalizer?.30 

17— What is a “toggle type” brake?.687 

18— Explain the principle of a “cam type” brake.686 

19— Explain how you would take up wear on an “external type” of brake. .30, 684, 689 

20— Explain how you would adjust a toggle type brake.687 

21— What are brake bands lined with?.30,691 

21a-What are internal brakes lined with?.30, 685, 691 

22— If a brake squeaks, what is the cause?.30, 685 

23— Give a brief explanation of how to use brakes.494, 685 








































3 


INSTRUCTION No. 4. 

Axles, Differentials, Bearings. 

1— Name the different types of front axles.31 

2— Why is the front axle dropped in front?.31 

3— What are the steering spindles?.31 

4— What are the steering knuckles?.31 

5— Name the different types of rear axles.31, 669 

6— Explain the difference between a “live” axle and a “dead” axle.31 

7— Is the “live” axle the one most generally used.?.31 

8— If “live” axles are in two parts, called axle shafts, how are they held together? 31 

9— Explain the principle of the differential.35 

9a^Name the various parts of the differential.34, 35 

10— How is the differential connected with the axle-shafts on a shaft-driven car?.34, 35 

11— Explain what is meant by a “full floating” axle..33, 669 

12— Explain what is meant by a “semi-floating” axle...33,669 

13— Explain what is meant by a “three-quarter” floating axle.33,669 

14— Can the differential be removed from a “full floating” axle without removing 

entire rear axle from under car?. .. ..33, 669 

15— Can differential be removed from a “three-quarter floating” or “semi-floating” 

axle without removing entire rear axle from car?.33,675,780 

16— How are differentials removed?.669 

17— How are axle shafts fastened to the wheels of a “full floating” axle.33,669 

18— A “three-quarter and semi-floating”; how are wheels fastened?.33,669 

19— Can the axle shafts be withdrawn from a “full-floating” axle without removing 

housing? How?...669 

20— Can a “three-quarter floating” axle shaft be withdrawn without removing axle 

housing? How?.669, 675 

21— Can a “semi-floating” axle shaft be withdrawn without removing the axle 

housing from under car?.-.669, 780 

22— Why is it necessary to take up wear between “drive pinion” and “ring gear” 

on a differential?.673 

23— How is this done?... -673 

24— Name the different kinds of bearings.36 

25— Where are plain bearings used?.36 

26— Where are roller bearings used?.36 

27— Where are ball bearings used?....36 

28— Describe the different kinds of ball bearings and their use and construction-36 

29 — When a ball is broken, how is it known?.36 

30— What is meant by a “radial load”?.36 

31— What is meant by a “thrust load”?.36 

32_What type of bearing is there which can take a “radial” and “thrust” load?-36 

INSTRUCTION No. 5. 

Clutches—Universal Joints. 

1— What is a clutch for?.37 

2— How is it connected to transmission?. 37 

3— How is it connected to engine?.37 

4— Name the principal parts of a clutch.37 

5— What is meant by “clutch-out”?.37, 41 





































4 


5a-What is meant by “clutch-in”?.38, 41 

6 — What device is used to throw the “clutch-out”?.39, 41 

7— What device is used to throw the “clutch-in”?.39, 41 

8 — Can engine be started with “clutch-in”?.41 

9— How can engine be started without moving car if clutch is held in by a spring?.41 

10— What is mean by gears in “neutral”?.41 

11— Why doesn’t car move if clutch is held “in” by a spring and gears are in 

“neutral”?..41 

12— After engine is started (with gears in “neutral”) what is the procedure in start¬ 
ing car?.41 

12a-What is the procedure of operating clutch when stopping car?..41 

13— Name the different types of clutches.39 

14— Explain the principle of the “cone clutch”.39 

15— Explain the principle of the “disk clutch”.41 

16— Explain the principle of the “plate clutch”.41 

17— Why is it necessary to adjust a clutch?.43 • 

18— Describe the principle of the Borg & Beck “single plate” clutch.4*2 

19— Is the asbestos friction ring positively attached to the driving part or to the 

driven part?.42 

20— How can a slipping clutch be remedied?.43,668, 661,669 

21— What should be guarded against, relative to clutch pedal?.43 

22— Which way should slot bolts be shifted to tighten the clutch?..842,668 

23— What should be done in case clutch does not work smoothly?.842, 668 

24— If a cone clutch slips, what is the usual cause?.661 

25— If a cone clutch is “fierce,” what is the cause?.662 

26— -If a disk clutch slips, what is the usual cause?.43, 663 

27— What is the remedy for a slipping cone clutch?.661 

28— What is the remedy for a slipping disk clutch?.43, 663 

29— What is meant by clutch spinning, and what results?.662 

30— What is the purpose of a universal joint?.43 

31— Explain the construction of a universal joint.43,680 

INSTRUCTION No. 6 . 

Transmission, or Change Speed Gears. 

1— What is the purpose of the transmission?. 45 

2— Where is it usually located?. 47 , 46 

2a-Describe three different places transmission could be located.46 

3— Is it ever located adjoining the rear axle?. 47 

4— Name the types. 46 

5— Which type is most ponular?.46, 48, 50 

6 — What type is used on the Ford?. 46 , 47 

7— Name the parts of a “selective” gear type transmission.48, 50, 38 

8 — Is the main transmission shaft, or square shaft rigidly connected with the 

clutch shaft?. 48 , 50 , 38 

9— Is the square shaft connected with drive shaft to rear axle?.48, 50, 38 

10— Is the main drive gear connected rigidly to clutch shaft?.48, 50, 38 

11— Then how is the square shaft made to revolve?.48, 50, 38 

12— When the “dogs” on the sliding gear on square shaft are thrown in connection 

with the “dogs” on main drive gear—would the square shaft then be made to 
revolve by power of engine?. 48, 5 o, 58 










































5 

13—How is “second speed” obtained?.51 

34—Is the counter-shaft (or secondary shaft) connected with the clutch-shaft? 
How?.48, 50 

15— How is “low speed” obtained?...51 

16— How is “reverse” obtained and must car be stopped?.51,493 

47—How many sliding or shifting gears are there in a selective type 3 -speed. 

transmission? .41 

18— How are they moved on the square shaft?.49 

19— How many shifting rods are there on a three-speed selective type trans¬ 
mission? . 49 

20— Are both rods shifted at once, or is one rod “selected” and then shifted? 

How?.49 

21— Name the two popular types of- gear shifting levers?.49 

22— Which is the most popular the “ball and socket” or the “gate” type?.49 

23— When engine is being started what position should the shifting gears (SG-2 

and SG-1, page 48), be in?...48, 51 

24— What is meant by gears in “neutral”?.51, 46 

25— When starting car from a standstill, what gears should be meshed and how?. .48 

26— When car is left standing, should the sliding gears be in “neutral”?.51 

27— Why would car not run if gears were in “neutral” and the engine run¬ 
ning?. 38, 51,488 

28— Could car coast if engine is running and gears are “neutral”?.38, 51,494 

29— Could car coast if engine is running and clutch is “out”?.38, 51,494 

30— Why is it necessary to always “throw-out” clutch when changing gears?.493 

31— How would you shift into “neutral” if car was running and engine run¬ 
ning? .51, 38,494 

32— Why is a “selective” type transmission preferable to a “progressive” type 

transmission?.46 

33— What is meant by a “unit power plant”?.46,121 

34— Explain the principle of the friction disc type of transmission?.46 

35 — How does a “four-speed” selective type transmission differ from a “three- 

speed,” and which is the most popular, 3 or 4 speeds?.47,490,500 

36— Explain briefly the principle of the “planetary” transmission.46,775 to 779 

37 — Does it contain gears; how many and what are they called?.779 

38 — Describe briefly, the action of the Ford planetary transmission.775 to 779 

39— How many changes of gears has it?.775 

40 — where is the clutch located on a Ford car?.775, 779 

41 — Of how many plates is it constructed—small and large ones?.779 

See questions to Ford Supplement for further information. 

The Magnetic or Electric Transmission. 

42— What is the purpose of the “Magnetic” transmission?.480, 481 

43— Is it true that there is no mechanical connection but an “air-gap” which con¬ 
nects engine with rear axle, if so, explain.480,481 

44— Is this electric transmission system called the Entz system?.480 

45 — Is there a generator and a motor?.480 

46 — Where are generator field poles located?.480 

47 — where is generator armature located?.480 

48— Where are motor field poles located?.480 

49 — Where is motor armature located. 480 

50 — Explain how the different speeds are obtained.480,481 

51— Explain how the neutral position is obtained.480.481 








































6 

INSTRUCTION No. 7. 

The Gasoline Engine. 

1.—How many motive powers are there in use?.53 

2— What type of engine is the gasoline engine called?.53 

3— What type of engine is the steam engine called?.53 

4— Explain the difference between internal and. external combustion.53 

4ar-What is the back and forth motion of piston termed?.55 

5— What is the motion of fly wheel termed?.55 

6— Is the gas combusted on both sides of piston in a gasoline engine?.55 

7— What forms the combustible mixture?.53 

8— What space is termed the “combustion chamber”?.53- 

9— What is the piston for?.55, 75 

10— What type of piston is used in a gasoline engine?.75 

11— Why is it necessary to have piston rings?.75 

12— What is the connecting rod for?.55 

13— What is the fly-wheel for?.55,307, 67* 

13a-Should. a fly-wheel for a two-cylinder or multiple cylinder engine be as heavy 

as for a single cylinder engine, and why not?.117 

13b-How is a fly-wheel fastened to crankshaft of engine?.65 

14— What is termed a “stroke” of the piston?.55 

15— What type is used most; the two or four cycle?.57 

16— How many “strokes” of piston are there to one revolution of the crank?.55 

17— What is meant by a revolution of the crank; what crank?.55 

18— Since there are four “strokes” of piston to two revolutions of the crank-shaft, 

does this complete the cycle?..57 

19— Name the four events that constitute a complete cycle.57 

20— Are these cycles repeated over and over again?.67, 57 

21— What is the “suction stroke” for and does the inlet valve open on this stroke? 

If so, how?.57, 59 

22— Should valves be open or closed on “compression stroke”?.59 

23— Are valves open or closed on “power stroke”?.57, 61 

24— Are exhaust valves open or closed on “exhaust stroke”?.59, 61 

25— What causes inlet valves to open?.91, 59 

26— What causes exhaust valve to open?.91 

27— By what means are they closed.?.91 

28— What would be the effect if they did not open and close at the right time?.59, 61 

29— Why is an engine first cranked or started by a starting device?.59 

30— Does engine develop power during suction, compression and exhaust stroke?..59 

31— What stroke does develop power?.59 

31a-Why does not the piston remain at the end of its stroke? What causes it to 

return?. 59, 67 

32— How is the speed of engine controlled?.67, 69, 61, 59 

33— How is the fuel introduced into the cylinder?.142, 60 

34— What is the carburetor for?...142, 60 

35— What is the purpose of the fly-wheel after gas is ignited?.67, 55, 307 

36— What is the purpose of the ignition?.69,206, 61 

37— What parts are necessary to produce ignition or a spark?.211, 60 

38— WTiere is the spark plug placed?.60,219,286 

39— Explain the prirciule and name the parts of a spark plug?.218,219 











































7 

40—When should the spark occur to ignite the compressed gas?.61,319 

41 If the spark occurs after piston is over top of compression stroke, will it com¬ 
bust all the mixture?.61,308 

42— What is meant by spark “advanced.”?.61, 67, 68,227 

43— What is meant by spark “retarded”?.61, 67, 68,227 

44— How is the spark made to occur at the right time?.61,227 

45— What circuit does the commutator close?.227,218 

46— How is commutator made to advance and retard?.61,222 

Note questions on pages 68 and 69 of text book. 

47— Why is it necessary to cool the cylinder of a gasoline engine?.69 

48— What number of cylinders are generally used?.53, 63, 70, 71 


INSTRUCTION No. 8. 
Engine Parts. 


1— What is meant by the “power plant”?.10, 11 

2— What is meant by the “three-point suspension”?.72 

3— What is meant by a “unit power plant,” and name the parts?.72, 44 

4— Name the stationary parts of an engine?.72, 55 

5— Name the moving parts of an engine?.72, 55 

6 — What part of an engine revolves?.55, 77, 87 

7— What part of an engine inoves in a “reciprocating” motion?.55, 864 

8 — Why is a gasoline engine single-acting?..55 

9— How is engine usually suspended in a car?.12, 72 

10— What is the crank case for and what made of?.72 

lOa-If lower part of crank case contains bearings, what is it termed? (foot¬ 
note) ..62, 72 

lOb-If it does not contain bearings, what is it termed? (foot-note).62, 72 

lOc-How is the crank shaft removed from the “barrel type” crank case?.62, 72 

lOd-What type of crank case is there on engine shown on page 647? What type 
on page 62? 

Bearings. 

11— Name the different kinds of bearings on a crank shaft?.72,641 

12— How many bearings are there usually on a four-cylinder engine crank shaft?.72 
12a-How many bearings are there usually on a six-cylinder engine crank shaft?.72 
12b-What governs the number of bearings on a six-cylinder engine crank 

shaft? ..72, 73 

13— Explain the construction of crank shaft main bearings?.73,641 

14 — When a bearing becomes worn what is the remedy?.73,641 

15 — what are “shims” for and, what made of?.73, 641 

16 — Where are “shims” and “bushings” usually placed?.73 

17 — what is a “bearing bushing” for?..73,641,644 

Ig—what bearings on an engine usually require attention first?.73,641 

Connecting Rods—Pistons. 

19— Explain the construction of a connecting rod?.73,645 

20 — What does lower end of connecting rod connect with?.73 

21 — What does upper end of connecting rod connect with?.73,645 

22 _How does upper end of connecting rod connect with piston?.73,645 

23 —What is a “piston pin” or “wrist pin” for?.73,645 





































8 


23a-What is meant by a “stationary” piston pin?.645 

23b-What is meant by an “oscillating” piston pin?.645 

24— What is a “yoked” connecting rod?....75 

25— What is a “side-by-side” connecting rod?.75 

26— What is a piston for?.55 

27— What is meant by “piston clearance”?. 75,651 

28— What type piston is used on a steam engine?.75 

29— What is the difference between the two?.75 

30— Of what metals are pistons usually made of?.645 

31— Does piston fit inside of cylinder tight?.75,651 

32— What “clearance” does a cast iron piston have?.651 

33— What “clearance” does an aluminum piston have?.651 

34— What are the disadvantages of aluminum pistons?.645,651 

35— What is meant by “compression” and “compression stroke”?.61,627 

Piston Rings. 

36— If a piston does not fit cylinder tight, then what prevents the pressure of ^ 

gas from escaping to the crank case?.75,654 

37— How are piston rings fitted to the piston?.75,654 

38— How do they prevent pressure of gas from escaping to the crank case?.75, 645 

39— Are the ends of rings open or closed? Name the two types of piston ring 

joints? .74,655 

40— What is the difference between a “concentric” and “eccentric” piston ring?.651 

40a-Why are piston rings made eccentric?.651 

41— What are piston rings usually made of?.77 

42— What is meant by “pinning” the ring and why are they pinned?.653,655 

43— If a piston ring leaks, what is the cause and result?.655 

44— Are the ends of rings absolutely tight when in piston groove?.655 

45— Then what prevents pressure of gas escaping past these ring joints?.655 

Crank Shafts. 

46— What is a crank shaft for?.77 

47— What supports the crank shaft?.77 

48— What part is the “crank arm”?. 77 

49— What part is the “throw”?.77 

50— How many crank pins are there to a single cylinder engine?.77 

51— How many crank pins are there to an opposed type two-cylinder engine?...77 

52— How many crank pins are there to a four-cylinder engine?.77 

53— How many crank pins are there to an eight-cylinder engine?.79 

54— How many crank pins are there to a V-type motorcycle engine?..79 

55— How many crank pins are there to a three-cylinder engine?.79 

56— How many crank pins are there to a six-cylinder engine?. 79 

57— How many crank pins are there to a twelve-cylinder engine?.79 

58— What is meant by a degree of circumference?.93 

58a-What do 360 degrees constitute?.93 

58b-By what sort of symbol is a degree designated?.93 

58c-How many degrees are there in a complete circle?.93 

58d-What part of a degree is a “minute” and how designated?.93 

58e-What part of a degree is a “second” and how designated?.93 

58f -How many revolutions of a crank shaft does 360 degrees represent?.93 

58g-How many revolutions of a crank shaft does 720 degrees represent?.93 










































9 

58h-How much of a revolution does 90 degrees represent?. 93 

58i-How much of a revolution does 180 degrees represent?. 93 

59 How many degrees apart are crank pins spaced on a two-cylinder opposed, 
type engine?... 77 

60— How many degrees apart are crank pins spaced on a four-cylinder engine?... .77 

61— How many degrees apart are crank pins spaced on an eight-cylinder engine?..79 

62— How many degrees apart are crank pins placed on a three-cylinder engine ?..79 

63— How many degrees apart are crank pins placed on a six-cylinder engine?.79,123 
63a-How many degrees apart are crank pins placed on a twelve-cylinder engine?.79 


64— Name the two kinds of crank shafts?. 79 

64a-State which is used most and advantages of each?. 79 

65— Name the two kinds of six-cylinder crank shafts.123 

66 — How does the piston transmit its power to the crank shaft?.55 

67— How does the crank shaft transmit its power to the clutch?.37 

68 — How does the clutch transmit its power to the car?.39 

69— What causes the piston to move?.55, 57 

70— How is the gas admitted through the inlet valve and when?.57, 59,143 

71— Why is it always necessary to start a gasoline engine?.59,143 

Cylinders. 

72— What are cylinders usually made of?.79 

73— What are airplane engine cylinders sometimes made of?.916,913 

74— How are cylinders cast?.81 

75— How are cylinders cast for six-cylinder engines?. 81 

76— How are cylinders cast for V-type engines?.81 

77— Name the different cylinder shapes?.81 

77a-What is the advantage of casting cylinder heads separate from cylinders?. .81 

78— What is meant by a cylinder cast in-block?. 81 

79— Is the connecting rod and crank arm in line when cylinders are “off set”?..81 

80— How is a cylinder finished inside and what part works inside of it?.81 

80a-How are valves placed on a “T” J head cylinder engine; which side for exhaust 

and which side for inlet valves? (foot-note).56, 81 

80b-How are valves placed on an “L”-head cylinder engine?.81 

Stroke and Bore. 

81— What is meant by the “stroke”?.81, 99 

81a-How far does crank shaft revolve to one stroke of piston?.99 

82— What is meant by the “bore”?.81 

83— What is meant by a “square stroke”?.83 

84— What is meant by “long stroke”?.83 

84a-How many degrees would crank pin of crank shaft turn if piston makes 

one stroke? .93 

84b-How many degrees would crank pin of crank shaft turn if piston makes 

two strokes ? .93 

84c-How many degrees would crank pin of crank shaft turn if piston makes 

three strokes? .93 

84d-How many degrees would crank pin of crank shaft turn if piston makes 
four strokes? . 93 


































10 


Miscellaneous Parts. 

85— What part is the combustion chamber?. 83 

86 — What part is the valve chamber?. 83 

87— What part is the inlet manifold?.83,159 

88 — What part is the exhaust manifold?.12,159 

89— Are exhaust and inlet manifolds always on same side of cylinders?....;... .83 

90— Should the inlet manifold offer least resistance possible to flow of gas?....83 
90a-If inlet pipe is long and exposed to cold atmosphere would this cause a 

tendency for the gas to condense?. 83 

91— What is the advantage of a “divided exhaust”?.82 

92— What is the advantage of water-jacketed inlet manifold?.82,157 

93— What is the advantage of an exhaust heated inlet manifold?.158 

94— Are the exhaust ports or valves always next to the water jacket?.91 

95— What is a muffler for and why is it needed?.84, 83, 12 

95a-What care must be given to a muffler? Why?.622 

95b-Of what value is a muffler cut-out valve?.84,608,732 

96— Where are valve caps usually placed and what purpose do they serve?.87 

97— Where are compression cocks usually placed and for what purpose?.87 

98— What is the commutator or timer for?.84 

99— What are spark plugs used for?.84 

99a-What is a cam?.87 

100— What is a cam used for in connection with engine valves?..87 

lOOa-Describe different forms of cams?.87, 94 

101— What is a cam fastened to and how fastened?.87 

102— How many cams are there to each cylinder?.87 

103— Name them.,.87 

104— By what other name is a cam-shaft known and what drives it?.87 

105— What drives the cam-gear?.87 

106— What drives the crankshaft gear?.87 

107— How many revolutions does the cam-shaft make to two revolutions of the 

crankshaft? .,.87 

108— Are both inlet and exhaust cams on one side or opposite sides of cylinder 

when cylinder is “T” type?.87 

109— How arranged for “L” type cylinders?.87 

110— Is the cam gear the same size as the crank shaft gear? How many teeth 

has each? .i.87, 89 

111— What is meant by “half-time” or “two-to-one” gears?.89 

112— Does the cam-shaft revolve in the same direction as the crank shaft when 

driven by gears?...89 

113— Does it revolve in the same directtion when driven by a silent chain?.89 

114— What kind of gear is generally used for driving the cam-shaft?.89 

115— Are chains used to drive cam-shafts, if so, state kind?.89,128,728 

116— Is the cam-shaft sometimes placed overhead?.91,109 

Valves. 

117— How many valves are there to a cylinder?.89 

118— Name them.89 

119— What is the “inlet valve” for?.89 

120— What is the “exhaust valve” for?.89 

121— What is necessary if a valve leaks?.92 












































11 

122— How are valves operated?..91 

123— What is the principle of a “mechanically operated valve”?.91 

124— What is the principle of an “automatic valve”?.91 

125— Which type is the most popular?.91 

126— What is meant by the “lift” of the valve?.91, 95 

126a-What is the average amount of lift to a valve?.95 

127— What part is the “valve face”?. 92 

128— What part is the “valve stem”?.92 

129— What is a “valve stem guide” for?.92 

129a-What is a “valve lifter” for and what other names is it known by?.92 

129b-What is the difference between the “mushroom” and. “roller” type of valve 

lifter? .94 

130— Where are the valves located?.91, 90 

131— What is meant by “side” operated valves?..91, 90 

132— What is meant by “overhead” operated valves?.91 

133— When valves are operated overhead can they be in the cylinder head or 

in cages? .91 

134— Can overhead valves be operated by push rods with cam-shaft on the side 

of engine? .90 

135— Can overhead valves be operated by cam-shaft overhead?.90 

136— Then how is the overhead cam-shaft driven?.90,137,915 

137— What is meant by a “poppet” type valve?.92,587 

137a^Name two other kinds of valves used on gasoline engines.138,139 

137b-What kind are used on two-cycle engines?.756 

138— WTiat part of cylinder does valve set in?.92 

139— What is the “valve stem guide” for?....92 

140— What is the “valve spring” for?.92 

140a-How and why do valve springs vary in strength?.92 

141— What is the “valve lifter guide” for and how renewed when worn?.92 

141a-What is a “valve rocker” and how many kinds?.92 

142— When valve is seated, should end of valve lifter touch end of valve stem?.95,110 

143— Suppose lifter rod did touch end of valve stem when cam nose did not raise 

valve lifter, then would there be a leak at valve seat?.95 

Valve Clearance. 

144 — What is meant by “valve clearance”?.92, 94, 95 

145— How is “valve clearance” adjusted on an engine with valves on the 

side?...92, 94, 95 

145a-How is “valve clearance” adjusted with an overhead-valve with rocker-arm 

and valve rod on the side?......94,109 

145b-How is valve clearance adjusted with overhead-valve and overhead cam¬ 
shaft? ...137, 913 

145c-How much clearance is usually given the inlet valve?.94, 95,634 

145d-How much clearance is usually given the exhaust valve?.94, 95 

145e-Is valve clearance usually adjusted when engine is cold, or warm?.95 

145f-Is valve clearance usually adjusted before or after grinding valves?.94 

145g-When valves are not adjusted properly what kind of a noise indicates that 

the space is too great between end of valve stem and. valve lifter?.94,634 

145h-What kind of a gauge is generally used to test the valve clearance with?.634, 94 
145i -Is the cam nose raising the valve when this test is made?..634, 94 








































12 


146— What is meant by a “pitted” valve?.92,630 

147— What is the remedy for a “pitted” or leaky valve?.92,630 

148— What is meant by “grinding a valve,” what part is ground?.92,631 

149— Are some valves ground to fit the seat in head, of cylinders and others in 

seat of valve cages which are removable?.91, 90,631 

150— What is the advantage of a “mercury cooled” exhaust valve?.824 


INSTRUCTION No. 9. 

Valve Timing. 

1— What does “valve timing” mean?.97, 95 

la-What does “setting the valve” mean?.103 

2— How are valves opened?.95 

3— When should the inlet valve open, before or after suction stroke starts?. .95, 96 

4— When should the inlet valve close?.96 

5— When should the exhaust valve open?.97 

6 — When should the exhaust valve close?.97 

6 a-Why are inlet valves closed, past bottom center and how is this possible 

without discharging some of the fresh gas drawn in?.96 

7— What is meant by “valve clearance”?.95 

8 — What is meant by “valve lift”?.95 

9— What is meant by “air gap” in connection with valves?.95 

10— What is the result if air gap or valve clearance is greater than the lift of 

the valve? .95 

11— What is the average “valve lift”?.95, 91 

12— What is meant by “dual valves”?.927,109 

13— What is the average lift of a 2 : *4-inch valve?.927 

14— What proportion is a valve made to bore of cylinder?.927 

15— Suppose a valve was large, say, 3-inch d,i. for a \y%- in. di. cylinder and the 

lift of valve was %-inch, would the valve be noisy, if so, why?.927 

16— Then how is this overcome with “dual valves”?.927 

17— Do large valves or valve openings increase the power?. 927 

18— What is meant by “back-lash”?. ....96 

18a-What is “valve timing” dependent upon?.96, 97 

19— Where is the most sensitive point in the cycle of a four-cycle engine?.97 

20— What is meant by “lag”?.98 

21— What is meant by “inertia lag”?.98 

22 — What governs valve timing?.98 

23— For high speed work where should inlet open and close?. 98 

24— How far does crank shaft revolve to four strokes of piston?. 99 

25— How far would the crank shaft turn to one stroke of piston?. 99 

26— If valves open too early, what will be the result?.98 

27— Are long stroke engines slower speed than short stroke?.98 

28— Is the inlet valve usually held open as long as the exhaust valve?. 99 

29— Does the shape of the cam determine the length of time a valve is open?. 99 

30— Is a valve opened, by a steep cam more noisy yet more powerful than one 

giving a slow opening?... 99 

31— Where does inlet valve usually open and close?. 99 

32— Where does exhaust valve usually open and close?. 99 











































33— How often is each inlet and exhaust valve on each cylinder opened during 

two revolutions of the crank shaft?. 99> 57 

34— Does two revolutions of crank shaft represent four strokes of each piston?. 99 , 57 

35— What is meant by “valve lap”?. 

36— What is meant by “zero lap”?. 

37— What is meant by “minus (—) lap”?. 

38— What is meant by “plus ( + ) lap”?. . 

39— What is meant by “valve lead”?. 101 

Valve Timing Procedure. 

40— Does position of piston determine the point when valves are to be set to 


open or close?. 


.103 


41 Then how is cam-shaft set so that the valves will be raised, at the proper 

time? .99,112 

42— Is it necessary to set both inlet and exhaust valves on a “T” head engine? 

Wh y ? .103,102,104 

43— State procedure for setting valves on a “T”-head engine?.102,105 

44— Is it necessary to set both inlet and exhaust valves on an “L” head engine 

with valves on the side? Why not?.103,102,104 

45— Which valve would you use for setting?.103,102 

46— State procedure for setting the valves on an “L” head engine with valves on 

the side?.103,102,104 

47— What cylinder would you work with in timing valves on a multiple cylinder 

en S ine ? .103 

48— Which has the longest period of travel, the suction, compression, exhaust, or 

power stroke? .. 

49— Does a wide or broad nose cam keep the valve open longer than a narrow 

nose cam? .. 99 9 4 

50— Which valve usually has the wide cam?. 99f 9 4 

51— Are marks usually placed on fly wheels to show when piston is at top of 

stroke? .104,102,110 

52— What marks on a four-cylinder engine fly wheel would usually indicate 

this? .104,107 

53— What marks are on a six-cylinder engine fly wheel?.106,113 

54— How would you proceed to time overhead valves with push rods on the 

side?.105,109, 636 

55— How would you proceed to time the valves of an overhead cam-sjiaft operat¬ 
ing overhead valves? .137,913 

56— Suppose you had an engine without any marks on fly wheel, how would you 

determine when piston was at top of stroke?.320,312,636 

57— How would you go about marking a fly wheel to show when piston was on 

top and also to mark when exhaust valve closed 10 degrees after top?.107 

58— Suppose you were told, to mark on a 17-inch fly-wheel in inches, what would 
10 degrees represent, how many inches from center line would you mark?. .115 

59— Give an example of valve timing in “inches,” that is, how you would proceed 

to time valves if you were told that the exhaust closed 1-32 inch after top, and 

engine had valves on the side? If there was no opening in end of cylinder 

head, and no marks on fly Wheel, then you might remove cylinder head and 

measure piston movement and mark fly wheel, but if you knew in degrees you 
could, refer to table page 115 and mark fly wheel without removing the head 
to measure. See also page.114 




























14 


60— How would you proceed to check the valve timing?.HO 

61— Suppose the valve timing was not correct, that is, if valves did not open 

according to marks on fly wheel what would be the procedure?.Ill 

62— Are there usually marks on the timing-gears?. 112 

63— Is it important that the valve clearance be adjusted accurately when set¬ 
ting valves? .103,112, 94 

64 — when silent chains are used, is the procedure the same as resetting timing 

gears? . 113 

65 — Does the cam-shaft revolve in same direction when silent chains are used as 

when timing gears are used?.113,112 

66— How would you proceed to time valves on an eight-cylinder engine with valves 

on the side?. 104 

67 — What is a “valve timing indicator,” or “trammel” for?.114,112 

68— State what is the average valve timing of exhaust opening and closing and 

inlet opening and closing?.. 444 


INSTRUCTION No. 10. 

Firing Order. 

1 — Does a four-cycle single-cylinder engine fire more than once during two revo¬ 
lutions of the crank shaft?..... 447 

2— How many times does a two-cylinder opposed type engine fire during two 

revolutions of the crank shaft?. 447 

2a-Stat,e the “firing order” of an opposed two-cylinder type engine?.118 

3 — Need the fly wheel be as heavy and of as large diameter on a two-cylinder 

engine as on a single-cylinder engine?..I 47 

4 — How many times does a three-cylinder engine fire during two revolutions of 

crank shaft? ..117,119 

5 — How many times does a four-cylinder engine fire during two revolutions of 

the crank shaft? . 119,116 

6 — How many different firing orders could a four-cylinder engine have?-116,119 

7 — Does the position of cams on cam shaft determine the firing order?.116 

8 — Which cams? . 446 

9— How would you determine the firing order of a four-cylind.er engine by posi¬ 
tion of piston and valves?. 120 

10— If a four-cylinder engine fired 1, 2, 3, 4, what would be the disadvantage?. .119 

11 — When a four-cylinder engine fires 1 , 3, 4, 2 ; when piston of No. 1 cylinder is 

on power stroke, what are pistons 3, 4, 2 doing?.116 

12 — When No. 3 is on power what are No. 4, 2 and 1 pistons doing?. .116 

13 — what are the different firing orders of a six-cylinder engine?.124,123 

14 — what “throws” of the crank shaft govern the firing order on a six-cylinder 

engine? . 122 

15— If No. 3 and 4 throws are to the left of No. 1 and. 6 throws, what will be the 

firing order? . 122,124 

16 — if No. 3 and 4 are to the right of No. 1 and 6 , what will be the firing 

order? .122,124 

17 — At how many degrees angle are the “throws” or crank pins placed on a six- 

cylinder engine? . 122,124 

18— How many “power impulses” are there to a six-cylinder engine during two 

revolutions of crank shaft? .123,125,124 




























15 


How many degrees do two cylinders “lap,” or are together on power stroke 
in a six-cylinder engine? ..126 

20— When No. 1 piston is on “power stroke” of a six-cylinder engine, firing 1, 4, 2, 

6, 3, 5, what are No. 4, 2, 6, 3 and 5 doing?.124 

20£ulf firing order of a six-cylinder engine was 1, 4, 2, 6, 3, 5, would the cams on 
cam-shaft be set in different positions, if it was changed to fire 1, 5, 3, 6, 2, 4? 
124. Which of the cams would be changed.? Would cams for cylinders No. 1 
and 6 be changed? . 124,123 

20b-How would the cams be arranged on a six-cylinder engine cam-shaft; make 
a sketch showing how exhaust cams and inlet cams would be placed?.121 

20c-Are exhaust valves always next to the water jacket? Why?.91 

20d-Are exhaust cams usually on outer ends of cam-shaft?.91 

21— State “firing order” of the eight-cylinder Model 53-55 Cadillac engine?.131 

22— If No. 1L is just starting to fire what are the other pistons doing on the 

above engine? .131 

23— How many “power impulses” are there to an eight-cylinder V-type engine 

during two revolutions of crank shaft?.127 

24— How many degrees do two cylinders lap or are on power stroke on an eight- 

cylinder V-type engine? .127-126 

25— Give the “firing order” of a twelve-cylinder engine (considering each side as 

a separate six-cylinder engine firing 1, 4, 2, 6, 3, 5)?.135 

INSTRUCTION No. 11. 

Six, Eight and Twelve Cylinder Engines. 

1— How many “throws” are there to a six-cylinder crank shaft?.123 

2— Which “throws” are in line on a six-cylinder “righthand” crank shaft?. .123,122 

3— Which “throws” are in line on a six-cylinder “lefthand” crank shaft?_123,122 

4— At how many degrees angle are the throws or crank-pins placed?.123 

5— How many revolutions does the crank make to one of cam-shaft?.123 

6— How many bearings are usually used on a six-cylinder engine?.123 

7— What type of crank shaft is used on an eight-cylinder V-type engine?.127 

8— At how many degrees angle are cylinders usually placed on an eight-cylinder 

engine? .128,134 

9— How are the connecting rods connected to the four throws or crank-pins of 

an eight-cylinder V-type engine?.127 

10— If crank shaft on an eight-cylinder V-type engine revolves twice, how many 
times would timer or distributor brush revolve on an eight-cylinder engine?. .131 

11— If crank shaft revolves twice and cam shaft once, how many revolutions 

does timer make?.131 

12— How far apart are cylinders usually placed on a twelve-cylinder V-type en¬ 
gine? .134 

13 — Would the angle of cylinders placed 45 degrees as shown on page 918, be 

suitable for automobile work? Why not? .918 

14— Does a twelve-cylinder V-type engine use a regular six-cylinder crank 

shaft?.134,135 

15 — How are twelve connecting rods attached to a six-cylinder crank shaft to 

make a twelve-cylinder engine? .134 

16— How many “explosions” or “impulses” are there during two revolutions of 

crank shaft? .134 



























16 


17— How many cylinders work together on power during two revolutions of 

crank shaft and for how many degrees? .135,126 

18— Explain the relation of movement of distributor to crank shaft on a twelve- 

cylinder V-type engine? .135 

19— When No. 1 R piston is on power or impulse stroke what are other pistons 

doing on a twelve-cylinder V-type engine?.136 

20— How does the “sleeve valve” engine differ from the regular “poppet valve” 

engine? .136 

21— How are the sleeves operated, what takes the place of the cam shaft?.136 

22— Explain the principle of the “rotary valve”?.138 

23— What is the difference between an engine with “rotary valves” and a “rotary 

cylinder”? .....136 

24— How does the Weidley engine differ from the L-type engine?.137 

25— How are the valves operated on a Weidley engine?.137 

26— What is the principal reason why a “multi-cylinder” engine is best?.123 

INSTRUCTION No. 12. 

Carburetion. 

1— What is the mixing together of gasoline and air called?.142 

2— How does the gasoline and air enter the cylinder?..142 

3— What is the device called which mixes the air and gasoline to the proper 

proportions and then feeds it to the cylinders?.142 

4— W T hat device on the engine permits the air to be fed to the cylinders and 

what shuts off the supply to cylinders?.141,143 

5— Name the parts of a carburetor?.145,147,146 

6— How does the carburetor differ from the old style mixing valve?.141 

7— What amount of air to gasoline is the usual proportion to feed to cylinders?. 142 

8— What device on carburetor regulates the amount of gasoline to be admitted 

into mixing tube? .. 

9— Where is the air taken into carburetor?.143,141 

10— When there is too much gasoline what is the result?.142 

11— When there is too much air what is the result?. .....142 

12— What is a float for?.143,145 

13— Of what advantage is the “auxiliary air inlet”?.144 

14— If the float is too low what is. the result?.144,145 

15— If gasoline leaks into float what is the result?.445 

16— What is the “float needle valve” for, and explain its mechanism?.145 

17— What is a “gasoline needle valve” for?. ;.147 

17a-Explain the difference between the “hand operated,” “mechanically oper¬ 
ated” and the “automatic mechanically operated needle valve”? .147 

18— What is a concentric float?. 445 

19— What is a “side float”?. 445 

20— What is the “throttle valve” for?. 443 

21— Why is it necessary to crank or use a starter, on a gasoline engine?.143 

22— What is a “spray nozzle” for?. 447 

23— What is a “venturi tube”?. 447 

24— What is the “air valve” for, and if spring is too strong, what is the result?.. 147 

25— By what other name is a “spray nozzle” known?. 447 

26— When a carburetor has more than one “jet tube,” what is it called?.147 






































17 


27— How is the speed, of an engine controlled?.143,152,153 

28— Name the different types of carburetors?.149 

29— Explain the difference between the five different types?.149 

30— Who conceived the idea of a simple form of carburetor?.144,150 

31— Who conceived the idea of adding an “auxiliary air valve”?.144,150 

32— What is the disadvantage of the Maybach principle?.150 

33— What is the meaning of a “Pitot tube”?.149 

34— What is a “dash pot” for?....150 

35— What does “acceleration” mean?. 150 

*36—Explain the relation between acceleration and gasoline consumption?.150 

37— Explain the action of a “compensating jet” type carburetor?.150 

38— What is a “metering pin”?.151,178 

39— Explain the action of a carburetor with a “metering pin”?..151 

40— Is there a carburetor with a “metering pin” and “dash pot” in the one car¬ 
buretor? .;_151 

40a-Would the carburetors shown on pages 172 and 174 be of the “metering pin” 

type? .Yes 

40b-Briefiy explain the “metering pin” and “metering valve” action of the Stewart 
carburetor on page 178?. 178 

41— Explain the action of an “expanding type” carburetor?.151 

42— Explain briefly the principle of a “Pitot tube” or “plain tube” type of car¬ 
buretor? .151,149,177,800 

43— Name the make of carburetor where a ball governs the intake of air?.152 

44— Give a brief explanation of a “venturi tube”?.152 

45— How many different kinds of throttle valves are there?.153 

46— Which type is used most?.153 

47— What is meant by “idling”?. 153 

48— How is the engine stopped?.153 

49— What is an “accelerator” for?.153,154 

50— What is a “governor” for?. 153,839,154 

51— Name the two types?.153 

52— On what kind of automobiles are governors used most?.839 

53— What is the purpose of a governor?.839 

54— How are governors operated?.839 

55 — What is the modern method for starting an engine?.153 

56— How is starting facilitated?....153,170 

57 — What is meant by “priming carburetor,” and state the different methods?.. .153 

57a-What is meant by “choking the air supply”?.158 

58— Does an engine operate better when hot than when cold, if so, at what degree 

of temperature?.. 

59 — what is the result of too much priming?.153 

60— What is meant by “vaporizing” of gasoline?.155 

61— Name the different methods of heating or vaporizing the gasoline?.155,158 

61a^Is the temperature of the gas mixture to cylinder of engine increased more 

with an exhaust heated intake manifold than with a hot water heated mani¬ 
fold? Why?. 155 

62— What does “carburetting” mean?.155 

63 _Will low gravity gasoline permit more heating than high gravity gasoline?. .155 

64—How is the air heated, before it enters a carburetor?.155,159,170 










































18 


65— What is a temperature regulator for?.155 

66 — Does an engine require more gasoline in winter than summer? Why?.155 

67— What is meant by “heating the mixture”?.157,158, 170 

68 — How can the “mixture” be heated?.157,158 

69— Which plan heats the mixture quicker when cold, “hot water” or “exhaust” 

heating? ...158 

70— Explain what would be an ideal heating method for “heating the air” and the 

“mixture”? .159 

71— If a carburetor is too small what is the result?.158 

72— If too large, what is the result?.158* 

73— What is gasoline produced from?.• •...158 

74— What is meant by “volatility” of gasoline?.158 

75— WTiat. is meant by “gravity” of gasoline?.161 

76— Is it advisable to open throttle all the way when engine is cold?.161 

77— How would you put out a gasoline fire?.161 

78— What is the result if water is in the gasoline?.161 

79— If old gasoline is used does it lose its strength?.161 

79a-Why is it necessary to have a small hole in the gasoline tank and where is it 

usually located?.162 

79b-If this hole becomes clogged, what is the result?.162 

80— How can kerosene be used for carburetion?.160,754 

81— Does it require more heating than gasoline?.160,754 

81a-If kerosene is used as a fuel, how is engine started?.160,754,827 


82—What is the difference between “gravity” and “pressure” feed gasoline sys¬ 


tems? . 164 

83— Explain the action of gravity feed system?.164 

84— Explain the action of pressure feed system.164 

85— Explain the action of the “vacuum tank” and “gravity feed” principle?... .165 

86— What method is used to draw the gasoline to the “vacuum chamber”?.165 

87— How is the gasoline then admitted to the gravity tank?.165 

88— What prevents gasoline being drawn into intake manifold when gasoline is 

drawn from main gasoline tank?. 165 

89— How is the gasoline fed to carburetor?. 165 

90— Suppose gasoline failed to feed to carburetor, what would you do?.163 

91— How would you proceed, to fill tank if empty?.163 

92— Are carburetor gaskets, or packing joints, necessary, and where are they 

placed? .164,159 

93— Which is the best, a long or short intake manifold? And why?.. ..164 

94— What is a “water jacketed” manifold for?.157,163 

95— What is an “exhaust heated intake manifold” for?.157,153 

96— What is the difference between “heating the carburetor” and, “heating the 

mixture”? .. 

97— What is meant by “hot-spot” heating of mixture?. 157 

98— What is the inlet manifold connected to and what is it for?.159 

99— What is the exhaust manifold connected to and what is it for?. 159 








































19 


INSTRUCTION No. 13 
Carburetor Adjustments. 

1— What is the first thing to see to before adjusting a carburetor?.166 

2— What are the parts to adjust on an “air valve” type carburetor?.166 

3— When a carburetor drips, what is the cause?.166,167 

4— How would you adjust the float?.167 

5— How would you test the float height?.167 

6— What is the gasoline level in a Stromberg carburetor?.167 

7— What is the gasoline level in a Rayfield carburetor?.167 

8— r-What is the gasoline level in a Zenith carburetor?.168 

9— What is the usual height of gasoline in the jet?.167 

10— Should mixture be richer at high speed than low speed?.168 

11— Does the quantity of gasoline consumed vary with the speed and the pull of 

engine?.168 

12— How would you test the mixture?..169 

13— If black smoke is emitted from exhaust, what is the cause?.169 

14— If blue smoke is emitted from exhaust, what is the cause?.169 

15— If flame from “relief cock” is light yellow, what kind of mixture?.169 

16— If flame from “relief cock” is red and smoky, what kind of mixture?.169 

17— If flame from “relief cock” is light blue, what kind of mixture?.169 

18— What is meant by “rich” and. “lean” mixtures?.169 

19— What is the result if mixture is too rich?.169 

20— What is the result if mixture is too lean?.169 

21— What is the cause of too rich a mixture?.169 

22— What is the cause of too lean a mixture?.169 

23— What is meant by “loping” and cause?.169 

24— What is meant by “choking” or “loading up” of carburetor, and cause?. .. .169,175 

25— What is meant by. “back-firing” ?. 170 

26— What is the cause of “back-firing”?.170 

26a-What is the cause of a “back-kick”?.170 

27— What is meant by “popping” in carburetor?.170 

28— What is the cause of “popping” in carburetor?.170 

29— What is a “choker” for?.170 

30 — What is necessary to change adjustment on air valve carburetors in 

winter?.... .170,171 

31— Briefly state what you would do to obtain a slow, even pull of engine without 

missing.171 

Read the description of the different makes of carburetors on pages 172 to 184 and 
note the difference, at the same time see if you can determine the kind of carburetor 
it is; if an “air valve type,” “compensating jet type,” “metering pin type,” “expand¬ 
ing tube” or “plain tube” or “pitot” principle. 

INSTRUCTION No. 14. 

Cooling. 

1— Why is cooling necessary?.185 

2— What part of an engine is cooled?..'.185 

3— How are the cylinders cooled?. 185 

4— Which system is most popular?.185 

4a-What is the purpose of the radiator?.185 

5 — is a fan generally used in connection with a water cooling system, if so, what 

is the purpose of same?.185,187 







































20 

6— How is the fan driven?.185,187 

7— How is the fan belt usually tightened?.187 

8— What is the result if fan belt is too loose?. 187 

9— What two types of fans are there in general use?.187,192 

10— Would the pitch or angle of fan blade make a difference of quantity of air 

drawn through radiator tubes?.788 

11— Should the fan be kept well oiled?.187 

12— What does a water cooling system consist of?.185 

13— Where are water jackets on a cylinder placed?.185 

14— Mention the two systems of water circulation.185 

15— Explain the principle of the “thermo-syphon” system.185 

16— Does the heated water rise and pass to top of radiator and is it cooled as it 

passes through radiator back to lower part of the water jacket?.185,188 

16a-How should the radiator be placed in the thermo-syphon system and why?.. .185 

17— Is it important that the height of water in radiator be maintained with a 

“thermo-syphon” system?.185, 788 

18— What is meant by a “force” circulation water system?.185 

19— What circulates the water in the “force” system?.185 

20— Is the water forced from bottom of radiator through water jacket of engine 

then to top of radiator?.185 

21— How are pumps driven and connected?.187 

22— Name the different types of circulating pumps..187 

22a-What type of circulating pump is used most?.186,187 

23— Where are radiators usually located?.187 

23a-Could radiator be located at rear of engine?.186 

24— Name the different types.187 

25— What is the difference between a “cellular” and “tubular” radiator?.187 

26— Explain the purpose and principle of the “radiator shutter” (fig. 10).188,191 

27— What other device is used to heat the water quickly?.187 

28— What is a “water thermostat” for?.187,191 

29— How is it connected and explain its action?.187 

30— Explain the purpose and action of a “temperature indicator”?.187,188 

31— What is a “condenser” for as used on the Cadillac?.187,730 

32— On what make of engine is the air-cooled system used most?.189 

33— Explain how the Franklin engine is cooled. See insert No. 2 and.189 

34— Mention the different air cooling methods.189 

34a-Explain how the fly-wheel can be used to assist cooling.189,186 

35— Name some of the causes of engines overheating.189 

36— Does driving on low gear and retarded spark cause excessive heating?.788 

37— What are the secondary causes of overheating?.189 

38— What are the primary causes of overheating?.189 

39— At what temperature does water boil at atmospheric pressure?.191 

40— At what temperature does engine operate best and why?.191 

41— What kind of water is best to use?. 191 

41a-Does water become heated more quickly in high altitudes?.582 

42— What attention does a circulating pump require?.191 

43— What attention does a fan require?.191,788 

44— How would you clean the inside of a radiator?.191,789 

45— How would you clean the outside of a radiator?.191 

46— -How can a small leak in radiator or water jacket be remedied?...:.191, 715 















































47— Mention some of the sources of leaks in a water system?.191,193 

48— If you thought water leaked into cylinder how would you test for the leak?.. .193 

49— What is the result if the water freezes?.193 

50— What is used to prevent water from freezing?.193 

51— Why is kerosene not suitable for use in cooling?.585 

52— Suppose your water did freeze would this cause engine to overheat and would 

steam come from radiator vent tube?.•..193 

53— In what part of the radiator does the water usually freeze first; top or 

bottom? (see foot-note).579 

54— If radiator is warm at bottom then the water would be circulating, would it 

not? (see foot-note).579 

55— How would you proceed to thaw out a frozen radiator?.788,193 

56— How would you test for a radiator leak?.194 

INSTRUCTION No. 15. 

Lubrication. 

1 — What is the purpose of lubrication?.196 

2— What parts of an engine requires lubrication?.196 

3— What is a “breather pipe” and what is its purpose?.197 

4— Name the different kinds of lubrication systems.196 

5— Name the circulating systems?.196 

6 — Name the non-circulating systems?. 196 

7— What kind of an oiling system has the Ford? (see semi-circulating sys¬ 
tem) . 197,772 

8 — Explain the principle of the “splash” system..197,198 

Sa~What are the objections to the plain splash system?.197 

9— What are the objections to the “full force” system of supplying oil to the main 

bearings and crank-pins?.199,198,200 

9a-State the kind of oiling system used on the Hudson and the kind of oil pump 

used and how it is operated and adjusted.198, 694 

9b-What kind of a lubrication system is a true “constant level” system?.197 

9c-What is meant by a “constant level”?.:.197 

9d-How is the oil supply regulated in a “constant level” system.197 

9 e-Is the viscosity affected by varying temperatures in a “constant level” sys¬ 
tem? ..•*. 199 

10— What is the oil pump for?.1" 

11— Name the different types of oil pumps.199 

12— How are oil pumps driven?.••.•'.1" 

12a-State the kind of oiling system used on the King and the kind of oil pump used 

and how it is operated and adjusted.198 

13 — what are oil “pressure gauges” for?.199 

14 — How are they connected to oiling system?.199 

15 — what would cause a variation of oil pressure?.199 

10 —what is the result if pressure is too high?.199 

17 — How is the oil pressure regulated?.199,198,200 

17a-When will maximum pressure be indicated and should oil pressure be adjusted 

when engine is hot?.,. 

18— Explain the action of the “spring and ball” valve for regulating the oil pres¬ 
sure, 199, 198, 200 and fig. 10, page.741 





































19— What is meant by “priming” the oil pump?.200 

20— If the oil gauge shows full pressure when running at slow speed, what is the 

cause?.....200 

21— How is the oil pressure regulated on system shown on page 198, in figs. 3, 1 

and 2..•.200, 694 

22— What is the maximum temperature in cylinders at top of explosion stroke? 

(foot-note).*....200 

23— Do gas engines use mineral oils?.200 

24— Why is a special oil required for a gasoline engine?.200,201 

25— Is it advisable to add oil of another kind to engine?.201 

26— When should fresh oil be added?.201,491 

27— How would you clean crank-case?.201,491 

28— Should crank-case be cleaned oftener in winter? Why? (foot-note).201 

29— What is meant by a “scored” cylinder?.201 

30— What are the results if too much oil is used?.201 

31— What are the results if not enough oil is used?.201 

32— Is the oil sometimes cooled on airplane and marine engines? (foot-note, page 

201 and 909 and page.915 

33— Is castor oil sometimes used in engines?.918 

34— If engine does not get enough oil what is liable to happen to cylinders and 

what is the result?.....202 

35— If piston “sticks” or “seizes” from overheating, what would you do?.202 

36— What is the result of using too much oil?.202 

37— Describe one effective method for the prevention of over-oiling.202,652,793 

38— If piston rings leak, what is the result?.202 

39— What is meant by “carbonization”?.861 

40— Briefly state the cause and effect of “carbon deposit”?.202, 623 

41— If black smoke is emitted from the exhaust, what is the cause?.202, 652 

42— If white or blue smoke is emitted from exhaust, what is the cause?.202,652 

43— If grey smoke is emitted from exhaust, what is the cause?...202, 652 

44— If the smoke comes out exhaust in a steady stream what is indication?.. .203, 652 

45— What is meant by “piston pumping oil”?.653, 793 

46— How can an excess of oil be prevented passing into combustion cham¬ 
ber? .652, 793, 202 

47— Are leaky piston rings often the cause of excessive smoke?.203, 655,652 

48— What are “oil grooves” in engine bearings for?. 203 

49— How should an oil groove be cut in a bearing?.203 

50— Why shouldn’t an engine be “raced” when cold? (foot-note).203 

51— When an engine is new why should it be run at slow or moderate speed for 

the first 1,000 miles?....203 

52— What is meant by “piston clearance”?.651, 588 

53— If clutch is a “lubricated disk type,” what kind of oil would you use?.201, 203 

54— How much lubricant would you put into gear box?.205 

55— How would you lubricate the differential and rear axle?.205 

56— Should graphite be used with a “force” circulating system?.205 

57— How does unvaporized gasoline thin the oil?.205 

58— If gasoline passes from combustion chamber to crank case is oil thinned and 

what is result?.•.205 

59— Is it true that raw gasoline drawn into cylinders during cold weather, due to 

excessive priming, causes the oil to be thinned?.205 










































23 


59a-Is it advisable then, to clean crank case and put in fresh oil in winter oftener 
than in summer?.205 

60— What is meant by a “lasting film”?. 201 

61— Describe a simple method of testing crank case oil.201 

62— What is the difference between the “flash point” and. the “burning point” of 

oil?.201 

63— What is the cause mostly, of oily exterior of engine?.203 

64— What is the most noticeable symptom of “burnt-out” engine bearings?.202 

65— Which bearings need the most oil new or old?.202 

INSTRUCTION No. 16. 

Ignition: Low Tension Coil Systems. 

1— Name three things required before an engine will run.206 

2— What is meant by “ignition”?.206 

3— What method was originally used for ignition?.206 

4— What is electricity?.206 

5— How is electricity transmitted from its source back again?..206 

6— What is used, to transmit the electricity from its source back again?.206 

7— Would this be termed a “circuit”?.206 

8— If the circuit is broken will the flow of electricity stop?......206 

9— What is the wire called which leads the electric current from its source?.206, 207 

10— What is the wire called by which it returns?.206 

11— If these wires were bare and they touched, or if there was a lead from the 

wire to some metallic substance, what would this be termed?.207 

12— What is a “conductor”?.207 

13— What metal is the best conductor?. 207 

14— What metal is next best conductor?...207 

15— What are “insulators” for and what are they made of?.207 

16— Are wires insulated., if so, how and for what purpose?.207 

17— If a wire has more electric current passed through it than it can conduct, 

what is the result?. 207 

18— What is then necessary?......207* 

19— Explain the meaning of “volts”.207 

20— Explain the meaning of “E. M. F.”....,. ..207 

21— Explain the meaning of “ampere” ..207 

22— Explain the meaning of “coulomb”.207 

23— Explain the meaning of “ohm”. 207 

24— Explain the meaning of “watt”.207 

25— What kind of a connection is a “series” connection? Make a sketch showing 

how three dry cells would be connected in series.207, 214 

26— Make a sketch showing 3 dry cells connected in “parallel”.208, 214 

27— Make a sketch showing 6 dry cells connected in “multiple series”.209, 214 

28— Explain what the voltage and amperage would be of 3 dry cells connected in 

“series”.207 

29— What would the voltage and amperage be of 3 (l^-volt) d.ry cells connected 

in “parallel”?.208 

30 — What would the voltage and amperage be of 6 cells connected “multiple- 

series”? .209 

(Note.—There is no difference between “multiple-series” or “series-multiple” con¬ 
nection.) 





































24 


31— What is meant by “resistance”?.209 

32— What metals offer resistance to the flow of current?.209 

33— In forcing current through resistance, is heating generated?.209 

34— What is a “rheostat” for?.209 

35— How many “terminals” has every generator of electricity? Name them....209 

36— Does the current leave the generator from the “positive” or “negative” 

terminal?.209 

37— What sign or symbol designates the “positive terminal” of a generator of 

electricity?.356 

38— What sign or symbol designates the “negative terminal” of a generator of 

electricity?.356 

39— What condition is necessary before current will flow?.211 

40— How is current passed, through a lamp or coil?. 211 

41— What is meant by a “short-circuit”?. 211,412 

42— What is a “switch” for?.. .211, 213 

43— What parts are necessary to produce ignition?. 211 

44— How can electricity be “generated”?.211 

45— Name the two kinds of “chemical generators” of electricity.211 

46— Do chemical generators produce a “direct” flow of current?.211 

47— What are “primary cells”?.211 

48— What are “secondary cells”?..211 

49— How are “dry cells” made?.211 

50— How are “secondary” or “storage battery cells” made?.211,212 

51— Are storage.battery cells called “accumulators” and “secondary cells”?.211 

52— What--terminal of a dry cell is the positive ( + ), the “carbon” or “zinc” 

terminal?.211 

53— How would you tell the positive and negative terminals of a storage battery 

if it was not marked? (see also foot-note).452, 212 

54— How would you find the polarity of a wire or terminal and what does this 

mean?.452 

55— What is the usual “voltage” of an ordinary dry cell?.211 

56— What is the usual “amperage” of an ordinary dry cell?. .211 

57— When should a dry cell be discarded or replaced?.211 

58— For what sort of service are dry cells, which are also called primary cells, 

intended, mostly? . . . . 211,210,255 

59— Can secondary cells be recharged again when exhausted?.211 

60— About how many volts does each cell of a storage battery give?.212 

61— Does the amperage of a storage battery vary with its size of plates?.441 

61a-Does the empere-hour capacity of a battery depend upon the rate of dis¬ 
charge? . 441 

62— How can a storage battery be recharged?.327,337 

63— How is electrolyte made?.212 

64— What instrument is used to determine the correct solution?.212 

65— When a storage battery is discharged, what will the voltage of each cell 

drop to?.212 

66— What kind of a generator of electricity is a “mechanical generator”?... .212, 256 

67— What does a mechanical generator of electricity consist of.212, 256 

68— How can the “field poles” be constructed?.212. 256 








































25 

69 When the “magnetic field” is produced by a “permanent magnet,” is this type 

usually a magneto, generating “alternating current”?.212,256 

permanent ^a^gnets 6 t0 construction of armature, but magnetos generally have 


70—When magnetic field is produced by an “electro-magnet” is this generator called 

a dynamo?. 212 

^ ^ armature is a “shuttle” type, would the current generated be alternat¬ 
es”? ...212,256 

72—If armature is a “drum” type would the current generated be “direct” cur- 


... U A-U) 

73 Could a “drum” type armature be used with either a “permanent” or “electro¬ 


magnet” field and generate direct current.212, 256 

74—What is an armature?.256,257,323 

—How is a “drum” type armature constructed?.256, 257,323 

76— How is a “shuttle” type armature constructed?.256 

77— Are “alternating current generators” divided into two classes? if so, name 

them . 257 

78— What is meant by a “grounded terminal” of a generator of electricity?.213 

78a-What is the object or advantage of a grounded terminal?.213 

79— Can the frame of car be used for the “return wire”?.213 

80— Which terminal of a generator of electricity can be “grounded”? (foot-note). 213 

81— If you saw the letter “G” or “GRND” on a coil, would you know that this 

terminal of coil was to be grounded?.213 


82—How can the ignition of an engine be started from batteries and then run with 


a dynamo or magneto?.....213 

83— Name the two systems of electric ignition.213 

84— What does the word “tension” mean?..213 

85— Is the low tension ignition system now in general use?.213 

86— Which system is in general use?.213 

87— Name the different kinds of “low tension” systems.213 

88— Name the different kinds of “high tension” systems.213 

89— How is a “low tension” or “primary coil” constructed?.215 

90— Explain its action..215 

91— Explain the action and how the low tension “make and break” system is used 

to ignite the compressed gas in a gasoline engine.215, 214 

92— Make a sketch of a low tension “make and break” ignition system on a single 

cylinder engine using a storage battery for source of electric current.214 

93— What operates the “igniter”?.214 

94— When should the igniter make the spark?. 315 

95— Could either “dry cells,” “storage battery” or “direct current generator” be 

used as a source of electric supply?.214,217 

96— Make a sketch of a four-cylinder engine using a “make and break” ignition 

system, using d.ry cells to start on and a dynamo to run on.216 

97— When a low tension magneto is used with the “make and break” system, is a 

low tension coil necessary?.217, 260 

98— What is meant by “electrodes”? (foot-note).215 

99— Explain the action of a “wipe spark”.215 

100—What type of engine is it usually used on? (foot-note).215 


































26 


INSTRUCTION No. 17. 

Ignition: High Tension Coil Systems. 

1— Is the high tension system sometimes called the “jump-spark” system?.. .219, 218 

2— What is the purpose of a “spark plug”?.219,218 

3— Name the parts of a spark plug?.218 

4— Where are spark plugs used on gasoline engines? (foot-note).219 

5— How are they constructed?.219,218 

6— Is the center wire or “electrode” of a spark plug connected with the electric 
current and is the “shell” of spark plug insulated from the center wire?. .219, 218 

7— How is the center wire insulated from the shell?.219,218 

8— Then the metal part of engine is used for the return circuit is it not?.219, 218 

9— Is there a “gap” between the center wire and wire on iron shell (S), fig. 3, 

page 218, when assembled and screwed into cylinder?.218 

10— Then how will the electric current jump the “gap” and produce a spark?.218, 219 

11— Explain the construction of a “high tension coil”.219 

lla-How is electricity “induced.”.223 

12— W T hat parts of a high tension coil connect with the “primary winding” of the 

“high tension coil”?.218 

13— What is the “commutator” for and how driven?.218, 222 

14— When the contact is made by the “roller” of commutator revolving, then the 
circuit is closed between the battery and primary wire of coil, is it not?. .218, 220 

15— Then what happens?.219,220,221 

16— When current flows through the primary winding of coil, although the sec¬ 

ondary winding is not connected with the primary, but merely wound around 
it, is there a “high tension” or “high voltage” current produced in the sec¬ 
ondary winding sufficiently strong enough to jump the gap of the spark plug 
points?.219, 220, 221 

17— What do the two ends of the secondary wires of coil connect with.218 

18— How is the current “induced” in the secondary winding?.219, 221, 223 

19— WTiat is the object of a “vibrator” on a coil?.220 

20— Explain its action.220 

21— Suppose there were no vibrator on the coil, would it be necessary to use a 

commutator or timer similar to fig. 2, page 220? Why?.•._225 

22— Then the coil with a vibrator is called a “magnetic type of vibrator,” is it 

not? And a commutator which would make a “wiping” or “roller” contact, 
would be necessary to use with it, would it not?.225 

23— If the “mechanical vibrator” is used (as in fig. 2, page 220), then by using this 

device instead of a commutator a non-vibrating coil would be used, would it 
not?.223 

24— If a coil with a “magnetic type of vibrator” were used, would there be a “suc¬ 
cession of sparks” at the spark plug gap?...225 

25— If a non-vibrating coil is used with a mechanical vibrator, would there be a 

“succession” or a “single spark”?.223,225 

26— WTiich is considered the most effective?. .225 

27— How is a commutator constructed?.222, 227 

28— What is a “commutator segment” for and how many segments are there to a 

1, 2, 4 or 6-cylinder engine?.227,226 

29— What part of the commutator is connected to spark lever and why?.227, 222 

29ar-What part of the commutator revolves and what is its revolving part con¬ 
nected to?.222,227 





























27 


30— How many revolutions does revolving part of commutator make to two revolu¬ 
tions of crankshaft on a 1, 4 and 6 cylinder engine.227 

31— Suppose you had a commutator and. high tension coil on a single cylinder 

engine, when should the commutator roller make contact and cause the 
spark?.316 

32— What is the difference between a “timer” and a “commutator”?.225 

33— Are timers (also called interrupters) made so that they “open” the circuit to 

produce the spark?.225,243 

33a-If so, what are they termed?.225 

34— Are timers made so that they “close” the circuit to produce the spark?.. .225, 243 

34a-If so, what are they termed?.225 

35— Do both “closed” and “open” circuit timers produce a “single spark” and are 

they generally used with “non-vibrating coils”?.225, 243 

36— Whether timer “opens” the circuit or “closes,” it produces the spark at that 

time and no other time. Does it not?.225, 243 

37— This is due to the fact that it is used with a non-vibrating coil, is it not?. .225, 243 

38— If a commutator is used, then it must be used with a “vibrating type coil” and 

merely closes the circuit, causing the vibrator on coil to vibrate, producing the 
“succession of sparks,” does it not?.225 

39— Must a commutator always be used with a non-vibrating coil?.225 

40— Make a rough sketch of a high tension coil using a magnetic vibrator type coil 
and commutator, connected to a spark plug on a single cylinder engine, with 

a battery as a source of electric supply.218 

41— Make a rough sketch of a four-cylinder engine with four spark plugs, using 

the same kind of a system, but with four vibrating type coils in one box and 
two batteries, either of which could be used separately.226 

42— Make a sketch of a vibrating type coil connected to battery and spark plug 

in a single cylinder engine with the condenser connected? (lower illustra¬ 
tion) .228 

43— What is an electrical condenser for?...... .227,228,229 

44— Where is condenser usually placed?.228,229 

45— How is a condenser constructed?.229 

46— How does the commutator or timer help control the speed of engine?_227, 68, 69 

47— What does “advancing the spark” mean?..227, 68,305 

48— What does “retarding the spark” mean?.227, 68,305 

48a-After engine is running why doesn’t an advanced spark reverse the engine?.. .308 

48b-If spark is advanced too far, what is the effect on the power of engine and 

wdiat is the evidence of this?.308,307 

49— What are the two methods of advancing and retarding the spark?.227 

50— If spark lever is too far advanced, what is the result?.227, 68 

51— If spark lever is retarded too much, what is result?.69, 319 

52— Should the spark lever be retarded to reduce speed?.69, 320 

53— The rule is, to let the speed of engine follow the throttle and make the spark 

follow the engine speed, is it not?.69 

54— Why?.69 

Study pages 229 to 231 for different coil wiring systems. 


55—How can a four-cylinder (or multiple cylinder engine) be operated with one 


vibrating type coil and four non-vibrating coils?.232,230 

56 — What kind of a coil is this called which vibrates for the four coils?.232 

57— Name the parts of the “master vibrator” system?. .230 































28 


58— How many segments should the commutator have?.227 

59— What is the advantage of this system over using four vibrating type coils?... .232 

60— What is the disadvantage of this system?.232 

61— How many windings has the “master vibrator” coil?.232,230 

62— How many windings have the four “non-vibrating” coils?.232,230 

63— What does “synchronous” or “synchronization” mean?.864, 232 

64— How would it he possible to operate a four-cylinder (or multiple cylinder 

engine) with one vibrating type coil?.232,230 

65— Explain the construction of a distributor.232, 230 

66— What part of the distributor revolves?.232 

67— At what speed does it rotate?.232 

68— Does one brush of distributor revolve and make contact for the primary circuit 

of coil?.232 

69— Does another brush of distributor revolve at the same speed and make contact 

for the secondary or high tension circuit?.232 

70— What is the advantage of this system?.. v .232 

71— How would a modern ignition system be altered to improve over this system? 

232 and fig. 2 and 3.242, 243 

INSTRUCTION No. 18. 

Spark Plug and Coil Troubles. 

Spark Plugs. 

1— When an engine stops what is likely the cause?. 233 

la-When an engine stops what should be inspected first?.233 

2— If engine “misses fire” or “explosion,” what is usually the cause?.233 

3— What causes a spark plug to “soot” and what is the result?.233 

4— Explain what is meant by engine “missing explosion”.233 

4a-Explain what is meant by “pre-ignition”.233 

5— State the usual spark plug troubles.233 

6— State other causes of spark plug “missing”.237, 236 

7— How would you test a spark plug to see if that was the cause of missing 

explosion?.233,237 

8— How would you test to see which spark plug was missing?.233 

9— How would you test out the spark plug itself?.233, 236 

10— If you suspected a spark plug was “leaking compression” how would you 

test it?.233 

11— What is the “plug gap”?.233 

12— What is the usual distance to “set gap” when used with “magneto ignition”?. .233 

13— What is the usual distance to “set gap” when used with a “vibrator type coil”?.233 

14— What is the usual distance to “set gap” when used with a non-vibrating coil 

as the Atwater-Kent, and similar systems?.233 

15— Is it essential that the battery be kept fully charged in order to produce a hot 

spark?.233 

16— If gap is too close, what is the result?.233 

17— If gap is too far apart, what is the result?. 233 

18— What governs the amount of gap to give a spark plug?.233, 299 

19— When spark plug is in cylinder under compression will it jump as wide a 

gap as when in the open air?.233 

20— Where is the spark plug usually located and why? (foot-note).219,237 




































29 

21— Should the plug be located where the water jacket surrounds it? Why?.237 

22— What would be termed a “poor location” for spark plug?.237 

23— What would be termed a “good location” for spark plug?.237 

24— How would you try setting spark plug gap if you did not know just what 

space to set it?.235 

25— Are good plugs required for engines with overhead vaLves and engines of high 

compression and. where are plugs located in engines with overhead valves? 
(foot-note 219).235 

26— Name the two kinds of construction of spark plugs.'.235 

27— Name the parts of a spark plug.235,218 

28— What is the “insulation” part made of?.235 

29— What is the “electrode” made of?.235 

30— What is the cement used for?.*.235 

31— What type of plug is best?.235 

32— What is the result of using poor grade plugs?.235 

33— How would you clean a spark plug?.235,237,592 

34— Name the different threads used on spark plugs.235,238 

35— What “thread” is used most?.238,239 

36— Explain meaning of “%-18”.238 

37— What type of engine is the “metric” thread used on most?.238 

38— What is meant by a “long body” spark plug?.238 

39— Does kind of “valve cap” in engine determine if plug should, be a long or short 

“body”?.238 

40— When would a “long thread” spark plug be required?.238 

41— Explain the construction of a spark plug for an aeronautic engine.238 

41a-What kind of a spark plug is a “double pole” or “double spark” plug?.238 

42— What are gaskets used, for on spark plugs? What are they made of?.239 

43— What type of a spark plug is used on the Ford?.808 

Coil Troubles. 

44— What is the most common trouble of a vibrator type coil?.235 

45— What is the cause of “sticking vibrator”?.. 235 

46— How would you test with the vibrators on a coil used on a multiple cylinder 

engine to see which cylinder was missing?.236 

47— How would you adjust a vibrator coil?.234 

48— How would you “dress the points” on vibrator and on vibrator screw?.234 

49— What causes a “pitted point” and what is the result when points are 

pitted?.234,235 

50— How would you test a coil itself?.236 

51— What kind of wire is used for winding a coil?.240 

52— What kind of wire is the primary winding?.240 

53 — what kind of wire is the secondary winding?.240 

54 — what kind of wire is used for winding the primary and secondary of a magneto 

armature?.240 

55 — What kind and size of wire is used for low tension circuits?.240, 425, 427 

56 — What kind and size of wire is used for high tension circuits?.240,425,427 

57 — should lamp cord wire be used for wiring a car?.240 

57a-What is metal conduit? and what is it used for?.240, 426 

58— How would you make a grounded connection?.240 

59 — Name other causes of missing as enumerated on page.241 












































30 


INSTRUCTION No. 19. 


Modern Battery and Coil Ignition Systems. 


1 — What is meant by a “constant source” of electric supply to the ignition 

system?.2 

2— How does the modern interrupter or contact-breaker (fig. 2 and. 3, page 242) 


differ from the commutator shown on page 230 (fig. 1A).242 

3— How does the system fig. 2, page 242, differ from the system fig. 1 , page 242?..230 

4— How does the system, fig. 2, page 242, differ from system, fig. 3?.242 

5— What is meant by “open circuit” principle?.243 

6 — What is meant by “closed circuit” principle?....243 

7— Do both systems accomplish the same purpose?.243 

8 — What is the advantage of the “closed, circuit” principle?.243 

9— What is the advantage of the “open circuit” principle?.243 

10— What is meant by “electrical lag”?..243 

11— What is meant by “mechanical lag”?.243 

12— What kind of a coil is used in connection with the figs. 2 and 3 systems?.243 

13— What advantage has systems, fig. 2 and 3, over fig. 1?.243 

14— Is a “single spark” given by systems, fig. 2 and 3?.243 

15— Name the parts of a modern battery and. coil ignition system?.245 

16— Where is the distributor usually placed?..245 

17— How is the timer shaft driven and at what speed?.245 

18— What revolves with the timer shaft?.245 

19— What part of the timer makes and breaks the flow of current if open circuit 

type, and opens the circuit, if closed circuit type?.245 

20— How many projections would, the cam have for a four-cylinder engine?.. .245, 244 

21— When projection on cam separates the contact points what happens?.245 

22— What is the distributor brush connected with?.245 

23— Does the distributor brush actually make contact, or is it the “gap” type? (it 

is the gap type).247 

24— Explain what is meant by “gap type”.247 

25— What kind of a coil is used?.245 


26—Is the electric current for this type of ignition system (Delco, Atwater-Kent, 
Connecticut) taken from a storage battery and also from a generator? State 


how and when. 246 

27— What is a “resistance unit” used for in connection with an ignition system?. .246 

28— Are there “resistance units” used with the “closed-circuit” type of “coil and, 

battery” ignition?.246 

29— What is an “electric thermostat” used for in connection with a “coil and bat¬ 
tery” ignition system?.246,254 

30— Explain the purpose and action of a “depolarizer switch”.246,248 

31— What is meant by “automatic advance of spark”?.246,249 

32— Explain its action.246,249,248 

33— What is the advantage of a system of this kind.?.246 

34— When the ignition unit is automatic, can it also be controlled by hand? 

How?.246, 249 

35— Why is the hand control also used?..246, 249 

36— If the governor or automatic, advances the time of spark with the timer, can 

the distributor housing be advanced and thereby gain more advance of 
spark? (foot-note). 309,249 



































31 

37— Name the parts of the Atwater-Kent “open circuit” ignition system?.247 

38— Do you understand the operation of the “contact maker” clearly?.247 

39— Is the circuit normally open and then closed suddenly and. opened again?.. .247 

40— Is a “resistance unit” used in connection with an “open circuit” ignition sys¬ 
tem? .247 

41— Is a “single spark” produced and is a non-vibrating type coil used?.247,248 

42— What speed, does timer shaft revolve?.247 

43 Study the action of the Atwater-Kent timer and distributor, pages.247,248 

44—Could either a “single wire” and “grounded return wire” (to frame), or 

“two wires” be used with this system?.249 


45— How does the Atwater-Kent “closed-circuit” system differ from the “open- 

circuit” system? .250 

46— Is there a “single spark” and a “non-vibrating” type coil used with both 

systems? .250 

47— Explain the advantage of a “single spark” over a “succession of sparks”_250 

48— Does the gas combust immediately when spark is produced in engine?. .250, 308 

49— State briefly how you would time the Atwater-Kent ignition system.250 

50— What adjustments are usually necessary? State briefly.250 

51— What is meant by “gap between contact points”?.250 

52— What distance is “spark plug gaps” set for use with this system?.250 

53— How does the Remy “timer-distributor” system differ from the Atwater-Kent 

“closed-circuit” type?.’.251 

54— Is the Remy a “closed-circuit” type?. 251 

55— Is a “resistance unit” used with this system?.251 

56— State briefly the adjustment of the Remy system.251 

57— What “gap” is given spark plugs with Remy system?.251 

58— How does the Westinghouse “timer-distributor” ignition system differ from 

the “Remy”?. 251 

59— Is the Westinghouse a “closed-circuit” type of ignition?..251 

60— Briefly state the adjustments and distance to set spark plug gap with this 

system.251 

61— What is the “ballast-coil” for, as used with the Westinghouse ignition system?.251 

62— Is the Connecticut “timer-distributor” system of ignition a “closed-circuit” 

system?. 251,254 

63— Explain the purpose of the “thermostat” used with the Connecticut system.. 254 

64— How would you test a coil?.253 

65— Is the Bosch “timer-distributor” system a “closed-circuit” system?.253 

66 — Explain the action and purpose of a “special switch” used with this system..253 


INSTRUCTION No. 20. 

Review of the Various Coil Ignition Systems. 

1— What is the disadvantage of the low-tension coil system?.255 

2— What is the disadvantage of the high-tension system with a vibrator coil?.255 

3 — what is the disadvantage of using a magneto alone?.255 

4— What is meant by a “dual” system of ignition?.255 

5— What is meant by a “double” system of ignition?.255 

6 — What w r ould be an ideal ignition system?.255 
































32 


INSTRUCTION No. 21. 
Low Tension Magnetos. 


Construction. 

1 — What difference is there between a “direct current generator” and a “mag¬ 
neto”? .25? 

2— What kind of “field poles” has a magneto?.257 

3 — What kind of “field poles” has a direct current generator?.257 

4 — How many kinds of magnetos are there in general use? Name them.257 

5 — How many windings are there on armature of a low-tension magneto?... .257 

6 — How many windings are there on armature of a high-tension magneto?... .257 

7 — is the principle of a magneto similar to that of a low-tension coil?.257 

8 — What kind of an armature is there used on a low-tension magneto?.257 

9— How many permanent magnets are there on a low tension magneto?.257 

10— What are the magnets attached to?.257,258 

11— Why is aluminum or brass base used?.302 

12— What are permanent magnets made of?.303 

13— Is the winding on a low-tension magneto armature called the primary wind¬ 
ing and. is it of coarse or heavy insulated wire?.257 

14— What does one end of the primary winding from armature connect to, if a 

“make and break” system of ignition?.260 

15 — what kind of arrangement is necessary to open or interrupt the circuit, is 
it called an “igniter,” if used with a “make and break” system of ignition?.260 

16— What operates the “igniter”?.260 

17— Is there a coil used with the make and break igniter using a low-tension 

magneto?. 260,259 

18 — Suppose you wished, to start an engine easy, which used the make and break 

system of ignition, and which had a low-tension magneto, could you use a 
separate ignition system consisting of a low-tension coil and battery, to start 
on and then use the low-tension magneto to run on?.260 

19— When should the interrupter of current by the “igniter” take place?.257 

20— Make a rough sketch of a “low-tension magneto” supplying current for a 
“make and break” ignition system on a single cylinder engine (Fig. 1).. ..260 

21— How would you obtain a “high-tension” or “jump spark” current, to use spark 
plugs, by using a “low-tension magneto” as a source of electric supply?.259, 260 

22— Is the armature, with this system a “single wound” armature?.259 

23— If a high-tension coil is connected, with this low-tension magneto, is the coil 

a “double wound” high tension coil?.259 

24— Does one end of the primary winding on the magneto connect with the 

primary winding on coil?.259,260 

25— Does the primary winding on the magneto supply the electric current for 

the coil?.259,260 

26— What kind of a device and what is it called, that is placed in between the 

primary winding of coil and primary winding of magneto?.259,260 

27— W r here is the interrupter located?.259,260 

28— How is the interrupter cam driven?.259,260 

29— Is the interrupter cam driven at the same speed, as armature?.259,260 

30— How many revolutions would the armature make to two revolutions of the 

crank shaft on a four-cylinder engine?.259,261 

31— How many sparks would the magneto give to two revolutions of engine crank 

shaft?. 259 






























33 


32— Does the armature give its “maximum spark” just as it is leaving vertical 

position?.....259,261,295 

33— Then it is necessary that the magneto armature be driven at a “fixed speed” 

so that the armature will be in maximum position when piston has com¬ 
pleted its compression stroke and ready to fire?.259,261,295 

34— Then must the circuit be interrupted, by the interrupter or contact-breaker 

just as the armature is in “maximum” position?.259 

35— If engine crank shaft turned two revolutions and armature turned two revo¬ 

lutions and four sparks were necessary during this time, then it would be 
necessary for the armature of magneto to have its closed circuit with coil 
“interrupted” four times, would it not? In other words, the armature must 
produce a spark every half revolution. Is this correct?.259 

36— What kind of a “cam” would be used on the end of armature shaft so that 
this interruption would occur every half revolution of armature?... .259,295 

37— When the primary circuit of magneto armature and coil is interrupted, what 

takes place in the secondary or second winding of fine wire on the high- 
tension coil?. 260 

38— What d.o the ends of the secondary wires on coil connect with?.260,261 

39— If one end of the secondary winding is grounded and the other connects 

with a distributor brush, explain how the high-tension current would be 
carried to the spark plugs in engine?.261.260 

40— What drives the distributor brush and where is distributor located?.261 

41— Explain the purpose of the distributor and name the parts and how con¬ 
nected? .259,261 

42— At what speed is the distributor driven, on a four-cylinder engine magneto?.261 

43— Make a sketch showing a low-tension magneto, high-tension coil and dis¬ 

tributor for a four-cylinder engine, showing the path of current flow of 
secondary current and of the primary current. s .260 

44— If the time of spark to occur, or interruption of primary current was when 

the armature was just leaving vertical position, with the interrupter in 
retarded position when starting, how would you arrange the interrupter or 
contact-breaker, so that the spark could fire in advance of this time, when 
engine was running fast?. 259 

45— Could either a “gap type” or “brush type” distributor brush be used on a 

magneto distributor?.261 

46 — What is the disadvantage of the low-tension magneto with a high-tension 

coil just described?.261 

47— What method could be used to improve this system?.261 

48— Explain the two methods of using a battery to start on and. magneto to 

run on?.261 

49— Explain the difference between the two systems shown on pages-262, 263 

50 — Would the system on page 263 give a “succession of sparks” by using the 

vibrator coil, battery and commutator to start on, and a “single spark” 
after engine was started, and switch placed so that the vibrator coil was 
cut out and other coil and magneto would operate?.263 

51— Would the system on page 262 give a “single spark”?..262 

52 — Would batteries be used to start on with systems on page 262, and during 
this time, the magneto be off, but the interrupter would be in use only?...262 

53 — By tracing the circuit at bottom of page 262, when magneto is connected, it 
would appear as though the coil would be cut out. Is it so or not?.262 





















34 


54— Then how does the current of magneto pass through coil?.262 

55— Can the condenser he located, in coil, or at any other point of the system, 

just so long as it “bridges” the points of the interrupter?.262 

56— It will bridge the interrupter points even though it be placed in the coil and 
connected as shown in illustration at bottom of page 262, will it not?....262 

57— Are systems shown on pages 262, 263 “dual” systems of ignition?... .262, 263 

58— Are the distributors placed on the magneto on the systems on pages.. 262, 263 

59— How does the “inductor” type armature differ from the shuttle type?.265 

60— Explain the principle of the Remy “inductor” type armature and how many 

sparks or “impulses” it gives during one revolution.265 

61— How many “impulses” does the K-W. inductor type magneto give to one 

revolution and why more than the Remy inductor type?. ....265 

62— Can the K-W. of this type generate current suitable for lights? Why is 

this possible?.265 

63— Is there a magneto which can be used in connection with a vibrator type of 

coil and which will supply current for the coil and. also lights without being 
set at a “fixed speed”?.265 

64— What other well-known magneto is suitable for lights?..265 

Ford Low Tension Magneto. 

65— Due to the fact that the Ford magneto has 16 coils and 16 magnets, its 
alternations of current are so close together it is possible to obtain current 


for light and a vibrator coil? Is this the reason?.265 

66 — Does the Ford, magneto generate alternating current? If so, explain the 16 

positions in each revolution.265 

67— Is the Ford magneto an “inductor” type?.265 

68 — Explain the eight positions in each revolution.265 

69— Name the parts of the Ford magneto.805 

70— Is the coil a “vibrating” type? How many units has it?.803 

71— What part of a Ford, magneto revolves?.265 

72— What part of a Ford magneto is stationary?.265 

73— At what speed does the magneto revolve?. ....265 

74— What are magnets attached to?.265 

75— Will the Ford magneto recharge a storage battery? (foot-note).265 

Oscillating Magnetos and Magnetic Plugs. 

76— Describe briefly an “oscillating” type magneto.264 

77— For what type engine is it designed?...264 

78— What is meant by an “oscillating motion”?.863 

79— Does the armature revolve in an “oscillating” type magneto?.264 

80— Is it a low or high tension magneto?.264 

81— Explain the principle of a “magnetic plug”.264 

82— Name the principal parts.264 

83— Is it used on a low or a high tension system?.264 

84— Make a sketch showing how the magnetic plug is used with a low-tension 

magneto for a four-cylinder engine? (fig. 4), bottom of page.262 


Magneto—Principle of Operation. 

85—Can a low-tension magneto supply current for a separate high-tension coil 
or an “igniter” as used, on a “make and break” ignition system?.266 































35 

86—Does a magneto work on a “closed” or on an “open” circuit?.266 

—Is current generated and stored in the winding during the time the circuit 
is closed and armature revolves?.266 

88— When the circuit is open what happens?.266 

89— What opens the circuit?.266 

90— When should the circuit be opened?.266,267 

91— What is meant by “impulse” of a magneto?.267 

92— When armature is in horizontal position is the E.M.F. at zero?.266 

93— When armature is in a vertical position is the E.M.F. strong?.266 

94— Technically, the correct time then for the interrupter to open the circuit is 

when the armature is in a vertical position, is it not?.266 

94a-What is the correct time in actual practice?.266 

95— How many “electrical impulses” are there to one revolution or 360 degrees 

rotation of armature?.266 

96— Is the “voltage wave” polarity in the same direction during the revolution?.266 

97— What kind of a cam is necessary to break or interrupt the current twice 

during a revolution?...267 

98— How would you set the magneto armature in relation to the interrupter?. .267 

99— How is the spark “advanced” or “retarded”?...267 

How Current is Produced. 

100— What is a permanent magnet made of?.267 

101— What is meant by the “magnetic field”?.267 

102— What is meant by “magnetic lines of force”?.267 

103— How do the magnetic lines of force flow?. 267 

104— If a bar of iron is placed between the N. & S. pole of the magnets, will the 

lines of force flow through it?.267 

105— Will it be an easier path? Why?. 267 

106— Is soft iron used for the armature?.267 

107— If a closed circuit of copper wire connected to a galvanometer, is passed 

down in front of the lines of force extending from the N. to S. pole of a 
magnet, will there be a momentary current generated on the wire, flowing 
in one direction?.267 

108— If wire is quickly moved up past the same pole of magnet, 'will there be 
another momentary current generated, but flowing in opposite direction?. .267 

109 — Then would this movement illustrate how current is induced in the wire by 

“cutting” the lines of force?.267 

110— When would the “induced” current be greatest?.267 

HI—in what position of armature would coil of wire on armature be “cutting” 

the greatest number of lines of force?..267 

112— Does electric current in the wire depend upon the E.M.F. to cause it to flow?.267 

113 — Does the generated E.M.F. depend upon the strength and quantity of lines 

of force and what else?.267 

114— Is the coil of wire on armature “cutting the lines of force” in fig. 4?.267 

115 — How are the lines of force flowing in fig. 4?.267 

H6—Which side of the coil is starting to cut the lines of force in fig. 5? Is the 

E.M.F. strong? Why not?.267 

117 —j s the L side of coil cutting the greatest number of lines of force in figs. 

6 and 7?. 267 

H8—What is most important in the generation or current?.267 
































36 

119— Is the path of the lines of force changed in its direction through armature 

in fig. 7 to what it was in fig. 5?.267 

120— Then what action takes place and is this time between 6 and 7, the practical 

maximum position for the interrupter to open?.267 

121— What are lines of force doing in fig. 5?.267 

122— Is the E.M.F. weaker?.267 

123— How many degrees has armature turned from fig. 4 to fig. 9? What part of 

a revolution has it made?.267 

124— Is the E.M.F. strong or weak in fig. 9?.267 

125— When armature continues to revolve from position fig. 9, will the “R” side 
of coil begin to cut the lines of force and will the voltage polarity then be 
in an opposite direction as per fig. 20, page 266?.267 

126— When the armature makes another half revolution per fig. 9, then the same 

action will occur but voltage polarity will be in opposite direction and during 
the complete revolution we would have had two “maximum” positions of 
armature, or two “impulses” or sparks, would we not?.267 

127— What is necessary for a permanent magnet to retain its magnetism? (foot¬ 
note) .267 

128— If the base of magneto, to which the magnets are attached, are brass or 

aluminum (in other words—non-magnetic), what would take the place of 
the keeper? Would it be the armature?.267,302 

129— This would depend upon the position of armature when magneto was idle, 

would it not?.302 

130— What condition of engine would place armature so it would not act as a 

“keeper”?.302 

131— What is meant by “magnetic flux”?.267 


INSTRUCTION No. 22. 

High-Tension Magnetos. 

Construction. 

1—What is the difference between a low tension magneto and a high tension 


magneto?.269 

2— Are there two windings on a high tension magneto?.269 

3— Name the two windings.269 

4— How many layers, and what size of wire is used on the primary and secondary 

winding of a Bosch high tension magneto? (foot-note).271 

5— Does the primary winding serve primarily for generating current?.273 

6— What purpose does the secondary winding serve?.273 

7— Is a high tension coil necessary to be used with this magneto?.269 

8— Where is the condenser usually located in a high tension magneto?.269 

9— How is the high tension current obtained from a high tension magneto?... .269 

10— Explain the purpose and location of the “collector ring”.269 

11— Where is the distributor located?.269 

12— Name the parts of the distributor.271,270 

13— Explain how the secondary current path travels.269 

14— What is the speed of the distributor brush relative to the speed of armature?.271 

15— Where are the distributor “sectors” located?.271 

16— How is the secondary current taken from the secondary winding?.271 

17— How many magnets are generally used?.271 































37 

18— What type of armature is generally used?....271 

19— How is the armature made? (fig. 6 ).258 

20— What is the interrupter for and where located?.273 

21— How is it constructed?.273 

22— Is it also called, the “contact-breaker”?.273 

23— Explain how the current flows through the primary circuit and how and when 

it is “interrupted”..273 

Condenser and Safety Spark Gap. * 

24— What is the principle and purpose of the condenser?..273,227,228 

25— How is the condenser constructed?. 273 

26— What is the “safety spark gap” for?.273,275,299 

27— Where is it located on magneto?.273 

28— Suppose the spark plug terminals were too far apart, what would be the 

result?.. .275, 299 

29— How would the safety spark gap prevent damage to magneto winding?... .275 

30— Explain the construction of a safety spark gap...275 

31— Is the gap at safety spark gap set slightly wider than spark at plug gap? 

Why?.275,299 

32— Does armature shaft run in ball bearings?.275 

33— How would you stop or cut-off magneto ignition?.275,299 

Examples of Magneto Systems. 

34— What is meant by “dual” ignition?. 277 

35— What is meant by “double” ignition?.277 

36— What is the disadvantage of using a high tension magneto alone?.277 

37— What is meant by a “two-spark” magneto ignition system, and advantage?... .277 

38— What is meant by a “two-point” magneto ignition system?.277 

39— With a “two-point” system would the spark occur at two spark plugs at one 

time? If so, what would prevent two cylinders firing at one time?.277 

40— What is meant by a “kick-switch”? (foot-note).277 

41— What kind, of a system is a “Bosch Duplex” system?.279 

42— How would you proceed to time the Bosch D. U. 4 or D. U. 6 magneto?.279 

43— How would you proceed to time the Eisemann type “G”?.279 

44— Does the winding of a Remy or K.W. Magneto revolve with the armature?. .279 

45— Where is this winding located?...256,288,264 

46— Is the wire wound on the armature and does it revolve with armature?.279 

47— What is meant by an “armature” type magneto?.279 

48— What is meant by an “inductor” type magneto?.279 

49 — Name three leading makes of magnetos in which the armature revolves-279 

50— What is meant by a “primary” wound armature?.279 

51 — What is meant by “compound” wound armature?.279 

52 — Could an “inductor” type magneto be a high tension type with two stationary 

windings? A primary and a secondary winding..279 

53— Describe (briefly) a magneto of the “pivoting” or “rocking” type.279,287 

54— What is the advantage of the “pivoting” type?.287 

55— Explain (briefly) the principle and construction of the Eisemann automatic 

advance magneto.287, 289 

56— How does it differ from the usual type?.287,289 

See page 286 and study the different ignition systems, first reading page 287 carefully. 







































38 


57— What makes of ignition systems would be termed the modern “battery and 

coil” ignition systems?.,.287 

58— State (briefly) in what respect the “Dixie” magneto differs from those having 

shuttle type or revolving armatures.290,291 

59— Does the Dixie magneto have a “revolving” type armature with wire wound 

on it?.290 

60— What kind, of an armature has the Dixie magneto?.290,291 

61— How many rotating poles has a Dixie magneto for an 8 or 12 cylinder- 

engine? .290,293 

62— How many rotating poles has a Dixie magneto for a 4 or 6 cylinder engine?.293 

63— Where is the winding located, and is it stationary?.290,291 

64— Is there a primary and secondary winding?.290,291 

65— Is the Dixie magneto a “high tension” magneto?.290,291 

66— How is the high tension current conducted from the winding on the Dixie, 

to the spark plugs?.290,291 

67— What is the “safety spark gap” for?.291 

68— What should be the width of gap of this device for high compression engines 

and for average compression engines?.291 

69— Suppose gap of “safety-spark-gap” was less distance apart than the “spark¬ 
plug-gap,” would the engine missfire? Why?. 291 

70— How would you remedy this? What distance would you then set the gap of 

spark plug and safety gap?.,.291 

71— Where is the Dixie contact breaker (interrupter) located?.292 

72— Do the contact parts revolve?....292 

73— Does the cam (which causes the contact parts to separate at the proper 

time) revolve?.292 

74— Where is the cam located and what causes it to revolve?.292 

75— Is the breaker shifted or moved, to advance or retard the spark?.292 

76— Is the breaker housing attached to the part to which the coil is attached?. .292 

77— How would you “synchronize” the position of “rotor” relative to opening of 

breaker points?. 292 

78— Is the contact breaker (interrupter) housing adjustable?.....292 

79— State (briefly) how you would proceed to time the Dixie magneto to engine. .292 

80— Make a sketch showing correct position of distributor brush in contact with 

segment when breaker is fully advanced.292 

81— Are there four sparks produced during each revolution of drive shaft on an 

eight-cylinder Dixie magneto?.293 

82— Are there four rotating poles to armature or “rotor”?.293 

83— Is the armature or “rotor” driven at crank shaft speed?.293 

84— How is the distributor geared to run, and why?.293 

85— What is meant by “cam shaft speed”? Is this half the speed of engine crank 

shaft?.293, 87 

86— On the 4 and 6 cylinder Dixie magneto, how are the “segments” placed in 

distributor?. 293 

87— How are they placed in the eight-cylinder distributor?.293 

88— How is the high tension current “collected,” and where is it conducted to?..293 

89— How many sparks are there produced on a Dixie 12-cylinder magneto, and how 

many rotating poles has “rotor”?.....293 

90— What speed does “rotor” revolve, in relation to crank shaft of engine?_293 

91— What speed does distributor on a Dixie 12-cylinder magneto revolve?.293 

92— How does the Dixie 12-cylinder distributor differ from the eight-cylinder?.. .293 

































INSTRUCTION No. 23. 

Magneto Installation, Care and Adjustments. 


39 


1— Where is the magneto usually placed on an engine?.295 

2 — What is the base of a magneto composed of?.295,294,302,301 

3— How is the magneto usually driven?.295,301,302 

4— From what shaft is the magneto usually driven from?.295 

5— Should a magneto be driven by a belt? Why not?.295,294 

6— Is the magneto driven at a “fixed” speed, and why?.295 

7— Is it a fact that the best drive for a magneto is a flexible coupling, as shown 
in fig. 4, page 302, which prevents strain on the armature shaft if it should 
be slightly out of line and also reduces vibration to armature? Yes. 

8— If gears are used to drive the magneto, then they should not be meshed too 
tight, as undue strain would result on bearings. Is this a fact? Yes. 

9— How many sparks or impulses are there to each revolution of a magneto 

armature of the usual type?..295 

10— How are these sparks transmitted to the spark plugs?.295 

11— How often does the interrupter break the primary circuit during a half revo¬ 
lution of armature?. 295 

12— How often would the interrupter break the circuit during two revolutions of 

crank shaft of a four-cylinder engine?.295 

13— How many sparks are required during two revolutions of crank shaft on a 

four-cylinder engine?.295 

14— At what speed would the magnetu armature then be geared to run?.295 

15— How many sparks are required during two revolutions of crank shaft on a 

six-cylinder engine?. 295 

16— How often would interrupter break the primary circuit during two revolu¬ 
tions of crank shaft of a six-cylinder engine?.295 

17— How many revolutions would armature of magneto make to one revolution 

of crank shaft of a six-cylinder engine?.295 

18— How many revolutions would armature make to two revolutions of crank 

shaft of a six-cylinder engine?.295 

19— Would the distributor brush revolve one-half the speed of crank shaft on both 

a four and six cylinder engine?.295 

20— What is necessary to determine before the magneto distributor can be con¬ 
nected with the spark plugs?.295 

21— How would you determine the firing order if you did not know?... .295, 119,120 

22— What is meant by “clockwise” and “anti-clockwise,” and is the drive or shaft 

end of armature the end where this is determined?.296,313,306 

23— If armature turns clockwise, what direction would distributor brush turn?..296 

24— Then it is important to first learn the firing order of engine and connect the 

spark plugs with connections to the distributor, in order that cylinders fire 
and brush makes contact on distributor. Is it not?...296 

25 — What care should be given a distributor?.297 

26 — What kind of wire is best to use from distributor to spark plugs?.297 

27 — What are these wires called?.297 

28— What, is meant by “static electrical discharge”?.297 

29— How would you prevent static effects?.297 

30 — Which of the plans, A, B, C or D, is best to avoid static effects?.297 

31— Should terminal connectors be used on the ends of all wires? Why?.297 






























40 


32— What is meant by interrupter adjustment?.297 

33— What should be the distance between platinum points? .297 

34— How is this distance usually regulated? .297 

35— If the points of interrupter are “pitted” what should be done to them?.298 

36— Is “pitting” of points on a magneto as likely to occur as on a vibrator type 

coil using battery ignition? Why not?..299 

37— What are common contact-breaker (interrupter) troubles? .298 

38— If engine “misses” more at low than high speed, (with spark lever retarded) 

should contact-breaker points be closer or wider apart?.298 

39— If engine “misses” more at high speed than low speed (with spark lever 

advanced) should points be closer or wider apart? .298 

40— Why? .298 

See questions 26 to 31. instruction 22, on the safety spark gap. 


41— State how, and how often you would lubricate a magneto....299 

42— Is it important that oil be kept away from interrupter parts?.299 

42a-What kind, of lubricant is best suited for the ball bearings?.299 

43— How is the magneto “cut off” from giving a spark? Explain why the primary 

circuit is grounded.299 

44— If you suspected the magneto to be at fault in case of “missing explosions” 
and only one cylinder missed (if a multiple cylinder engine) then you would 
know that the trouble was not likely to be with magneto, would you not?. .299 

45— Whereas, if all cylinders failed to fire, then it would be time to look to the 

magneto for trouble. Is this assumption correct?.299 

46— Name the three sources where trouble with a magneto would most likely 

occur.299 

47— How would you tell if safety spark gap was short circuited?.299 

48— How would you determine if spark plug gap was too wide?.299 

49— What would likely be cause of no spark at all?.299 

50— What would likely be cause of missing at low speeds?.299 

51— What would, likely be cause of missing at high speeds?.299 

52— What would likely be cause of ignition failing suddenly?.300 

53— Is it necessary to give a quick, sudden pull to starting crank (if not equipped 

with self starter) to start a magneto generating .300 

54— Then if engine did not start what would likely be the trouble if you “knew” 

that the carburetion was all right?.300 

55— How would you facilitate easy starting when stopping engine?.300 

56— What is meant by “synchronizing” the interrupter points, cam and. dis¬ 
tributor? .301,864 

57— If the winding on a magneto is suspected of being short circuited, and miss¬ 
ing occurs and cannot be located, how would you diagnose the trouble?.301 

58— How would you test secondary winding?.301, 302 

59— Suppose you had a “dual” system of ignition consisting of a battery and coil 

and a high tension magneto and while running with a high tension magneto, 
missing would occur, would you then throw on the battery and coil and see if 
the missing continued, and if it did not, would you then look for the trouble 
in the magneto? .. 301 

60— What is meant by “remagnetizing magnets”? .301, 303 

61— How would you test to see if magnets needed remagnetizing or charging?.301. 303 

62— What are magnets made of? .... 303 

63— Does soft steel lose its magnetism easily? . 303 

































41 


63a--When magnets are weak what is the result? .303 

64— Should all like poles of a magnet be on one side? .303 

65— How would you test to see which is the “N” or “S” pole of a magnet?.303 

66— How would you test a high tension coil?.302 

67— How would you test a condenser?.303 

68— When condenser is not working properly, what is the result?.303 


INSTRUCTION No. 24. 

Ignition Timing. 

1— What position should, armature be in when the “charge of gas” is to be 

ignited?.305,266,267,310,309 

2— What position is piston, and on what stroke when spark should occur?.307 

3— If engine is started by hand should spark be retarded or advanced?.305 

4— What is meant by “advance of spark”?. 305 

5— What is meant by “retard of spark”?.'..305 

6— What determines the amount of “advance” and “retard” to give the spark?.305 

7— What methods are used to “retard” and “advance” the spark?.305 

8— Explain what is meant by “hand control” of spark.305 

9— Explain what is meant by “automatic advance” of spark.307 

10— Explain what is meant by “fixed spark”.307 

11— What is the disadvantage of a “fixed spark”?.....307 

12— When should the spark occur?.307,308 

13— Suppose it occurs after piston has started down, is the “compression” as 

great, and what is the result?.’.307 

14 — Suppose it occurs before the piston is on top of its compression stroke, what 

is the result?-... 307 

15— Does the “combustion” occur immediately when spark occurs?.308 

16— Then how would you determine just how far advanced of top of compression 

stroke to have spark occur?.308 

17 — what are the two main points to first be considered?.308 

18 — What is the second consideration?.308 

19 — Suppose engine was running 500 r.p.m., would the spark occur later (retarded) 

than if engine was running 1,000 r.p.m.?.308 

20— As the speed increases it is necessary to have the spark occur earlier or ad¬ 
vanced, is it not?.308 

21 _Then, “setting the time of spark to occur before top of compression stroke” 

is called “advancing the spark.” Is it not?...308 

22 _How many revolutions would armature make to two revolutions of crank 

shaft, on a four-cylinder engine?.308 

23 _What speed would distributor turn (on the four-cylinder engine magneto) 

when crank shaft turned two revolutions?.308 

24 —Would a “two-point cam” on interrupter be used? Why?..308 

25 _Does the cam shaft on either a four or six cylinder engine turn one revolu¬ 

tion to two of crank shaft?..308 

26 _How many revolutions would armature, distributor and cam turn on a six- 

cylinder engine magneto when crank shaft of engine turned two revolu¬ 
tions? .309,294 

27 —Would a “two-point cam” be used on interrupter? Yes. 

































42 

28— How far apart are “contact segments” placed on a six-cylinder magneto dis¬ 
tributor? ..309 

29— How many sparks does a single-cylinder engine require, and how is the 

“cam” arranged to permit one spark every other revolution?.309 

30— What position is armature of magneto in, when it is at maximum position?.309 

31— What is meant by “maximum position”?.309 

32— When armature is in maximum position is the cam separating the points on 

contact-breaker? . . . . .309 

33— Suppose the “contact breaker” was retarded, then the “contact breaker 

points” would not separate and, cause spark to occur until armature had 
passed maximum position. Is this not a fact?.309 

34— What would be the result?.309 

35— In what position is armature, when retarded?.309 

36— When speed of engine is slow, should contact breaker be retarded? Why?..309 

37— If speed were increased., should contact breaker be advanced? Why.309 

38— What is the average “range of advance” or movement of contact-breaker 

housing? (foot-note) .309 

39— Is there a greater range with a timer, such as the Atwater-Kent system?..309 

40— About how much space is there between the “armature cheek” and “pole 

piece,” when armature is advanced or at “maximum” position?.309 

41— What rate of speed of an engine is termed “average speed,” and what rate 

“high speed”?.309 

42— When “setting a magneto” what particular points are necessary to consider?.309 

43— What is meant by “setting tjie time of spark” of a magneto?.311 

44— What positions of piston could you consider when setting the time for the 

spark to occur?.311 

45— What is meant by a “variable spark”?..311 

46— What is meant by a “fixed spark”?. 311 

47— When “setting a magneto” with a “fixed spark” where would contact-breaker 

be set, “advanced” or “retarded”?.311 

48— When “setting the magneto” with “variable spark,” briefly state the three 

methods which could be employed. 311 

49— How would you proceed to “set a magneto” if you saw a mark “C” or “F” 

on fly-wheel?. 311 

50— How would you proceed to “set a magneto” if you were told that the time 

for spark to occur was full advance position measured 3% inches on fly-wheel 
before upper dead center?. 311 

51— Suppose you were instructed to set the spark 34 degrees before top of com¬ 

pression stroke, “advanced,” on an engine with a stroke of 5 % inches, how 
would you proceed?...311 

52— Is there a “battery interrupter” and a “magneto interrupter” both mounted 

on the magneto of a Bosch Dual Magneto Ignition System?.311,281 

53— Would you “set the magneto interrupter” and would this answer for both?. .311 

54— Does the “battery interrupter” break its contact 10 degrees later and is this 

taken care of in setting the magneto interrupter?. 311 

55— What distance should the “interrupter points” and “spark plug points” be set 

with the Bosch Dual System?.... 

56— Which of the three methods is used most for “setting a magneto” (as ex¬ 

plained under a, b, c, referring to setting a magneto of the variable spark 
type)? .. 311 


























43 


57 Is this the method shown on page 310, “setting piston” on top and “ignition 
retarded,” the method generally used?.311,310 

58— Make a sketch showing piston on top of compression stroke, “contact breaker 

retarded,” and show what the cam on interrupter is doing, also what position 
cam of exhaust valve would be in and where distributor brush would be, to 
fire cylinder No. 1, supposing this was a four-cylinder engine?..310 

59— Which cylinder on a multiple-cylinder engine, is usually the one used to set 

a magneto with position of piston?..311,310 

60— W’hy is piston placed on top of compression stroke?.307 

61— How would you find the “compression stroke” of an engine?.310,320,312 

62— In setting a magneto, is it necessary to uncouple it from its drive? If so, 

how?. 312 

63— Is the magneto usually driven from cam shaft or crank shaft?.295,294 

64— Suppose you were told to “set piston % inch after top of compression,” and 

“set interrupter housing retarded,” how would you proceed?.310 

65— Is this the setting usually for slow speed engines?.310 

66— Is this a similar setting as the Waukesha?.312 

67— How would you time or set a Remy inductor type magneto?.313 

68— How would you time or set the Eisemann magneto?.313 

69— When timing a high tension magneto to an engine (taking a four-cylinder 

engine as an example), state briefly what points should be considered.313 

70— Does the old style ignition system (using a vibrator type coil and commutator) 

require a greater advance setting than a magneto? Why?.315,316 

71— How would you proceed to time the ignition on a Ford engine?.316 

72— What distance would you set the spark plug gap?.316 

73— Suppose an Atwater-Kent ignition system was placed on a Ford engine, 

where would you place piston, and why?.316 

74— How would you time ignition for a “make and break” ignition system, using 

a low tension magneto?..316 

75— How would you set the time of spark on a stationary engine? (foot-note) page 315 

76— What is meant by “checking ignition timing”?.316 

77— What is meant by “remeshing timing gears”?.316 

78— State procedure to set time of spark using the Atwater-Kent ignition system.317 

79— State procedure of timing the Connecticut ignition system.253 

80— What is meant by “verifying ignition timing”?.317 

81— How would you test to see if ignition is set too far advanced?..317 

82— Is it advisable to ignite the charge of gas as near the point of maximum 

compression as possible?.319 

83— Is there greater heat produced in engine when spark is retarded?.319 

84— Suppose you had spark advanced full and were running at high speed and 
came to a hill where engine slows down considerably, would piston be coming 
up or going down, when ignition took place, and what would be the result?. .319 

85— In this case the spark should be retarded—should it not?.319 

86— What is meant by an “ignition knock”?.320 

87— Should engine be run with spark advanced as far as possible without causing 

it to knock, and why?.....320 

88— What are the marks usually on fly-wheels of engines to indicate when piston 
is on top of its compression stroke and what will this mark line up with?..320 

89 — What pistons would this mark represent if it was on top of compression 

stroke, “DC1-4,” and would this refer to a four-cylinder engine?.320 































44 

90— If a six-cylinder engine was marked “DC1-6,” what would, this mean, and 

why?..320 

91— If your fly-wheel is not marked and it is not possible to place a wire through 

head of cylinder, how would you then proceed to find when piston was on 
top of compression stroke?.320 


INSTRUCTIONS Nos. 25 and 26. 

Engine Starters and Electric Starting Motors. 

1—Why is it necessary to first start a gasoline engine either by cranking by 


hand or some form of self-starter?.59,143 

2— What method was first used to start engine without using a crank?.321 

3— Was this method always reliable?.*.321 

4— Mention other methods of starting an engine, other than by hand crank or 

electric motor?.321 

5— What is the principle of the Christensen gasoline and air starter?.321 

6 — Is the electric starting motor the modern method?.321 

7— What are its advantages?..321,325 

8 — From where does the electric starting motor obtain its electric current?.321, 325 

9— Briefly state what an electric starting motor is for.325 

10— Name the parts of an electric starting motor.325 

11— How is an electric starting motor usually wound?.323,325 

12— What is meant by a “permanently” magnetized field core?.325 

13— What is meant by an “electro” magnetized field core?.325 

13a-What name is given'to a two-pole machine?.325 

14— What is it called when it has more than two poles?.325 

15— What part of an electric starting motor is the armature?.325 

16— What does it revolve between?.325 

17— What type of armature is most generally used for starting motors?.325 

18— Could the shuttle type armature be used on a starting motor? Why not?..325 

19— Is the electric current used for a starting motor direct or alternating cur¬ 
rent? .325 

20— What is the purpose of a commutator on an armature?. ....325 

21— How is it constructed?. 325 

22— What purpose do the brushes serve and where located on a starting motor?.325 

23— What are brushes usually made of, and how many are there to a starting 

motor?.325 

24— Does a great quantity of current pass through the brushes when starting an 

engine with a starting motor?.325 

25— What are the usual commutator troubles?.325 

26— How can the electric starting motor be connected to the engine? Name the 

different methods.327 

27— Name the two drive methods through fly-wheel..327 

28— Name the two automatic methods..327 

29— Which system is most popular?.327 

30— After engine is started, how is the starting motor stopped?.327 

31— What kind of switches are used for starting motors?.,.327,329 

32— From what source does the electric starting motor obtain its electric supply?.327 

33— What is the usual voltage?.327 

34— How could you determine the voltage of a storage battery?.327 



































45 

35— How many volts does each cell give?.327 

36— Is the current consumed by a starting motor when first starting engine, very 

heavy? .327 

37— About what length of time is it necessary to hold, switch closed?.327 

38— State the average cranking current in amperes when first starting and for 

how long...327 

39— Is the overload on battery considerable and is it practically short-circuited 

for an instant when first starting?.327 

40— What method is used to charge a storage battery when it has exhausted its 

current?.327 

41— What is meant by a “multi-polar” and “bi-polar” type field pole?.328 

42— Explain the principle and. action of the Bendix automatic principle of start¬ 
ing .326, 331 

43— Explain the principle and action of the starting motor using a “displacement” 

type of armature.330 


INSTRUCTION No. 27. 

The Electric Generator. 

1— Do the words “dynamo” and “generator” (referred to in this instruction), 

mean the same thing? (foot-note).333 

2— Is an electric generator similar in many respects to an electric motor?... .333 

3— In what respect do they differ?.333 

4 — Could a “series,” “shunt” or “compound wound.” generator operate as a 

motor?. 

5— Name the parts of a dynamo or generator.333, 335 

6— What is a generator used for on an automobile (in addition to charging the 

battery)?.333,335 

7— Is the current generated, direct or alternating?.333, 335 

8 — Would alternating current charge a storage battery?.335,447 

9 — what kind of windings are there on a generator of the type we propose 

using for charging the storage battery on a car?.335 

10— What does the word “shunt” mean?.335 

11 — Into h 0W many classes are direct current dynamos or generators divided.. .335 

lla-In what manner do they differ?.335 

12 — What part of a generator is the “field core”?.335 

13— In what two ways can the “magnetic field” be produced?.335 

14— Which of the two is the most popular?.335 

15 — What manner of winding has the armature of a direct current generator?. .335 

16 — By what means is the electric generator usually operated?.337 

17 — when operated by a silent chain, state the different methods employed to 

adjust the tension of chain.728 

18— Should the chain be as tight as possible without causing noise?.728 

19 — what amount of free movement should chain have?.728 

20— Explain the principle of the “Morse adjustable sprocket” used with that 

make of silent chain.728 

2 1 _When engine is running slow, or not at all, from what source is the current 

for lights and ignition obtained?.337 

22 _When engine is running at seven to ten miles, or over (car speed), from 

what source is the current for lights, ignition and current to charge the 
battery obtained?. 337 
































46 

23— What device is used to connect the battery with generator at this speed and 

to disconnect battery at low speeds?.337 

24— What is the purpose of the “automatic cut-out”?.337 

25— What is meant by the term, “floating the storage battery on the line”?-337 

26— Are there two coils on the Ward Leonard automatic “cut-out”?.344 

27— What is the name of coil A, on “cut-out,” page 344, and what does it con¬ 
nect with?.344 

28— What is the name of coil L, on “cut-out,” page 344, and what is it connected 

with?.344 

29— What is the purpose of coil L?.344 

30— Why is de-magnetization necessary, and what action takes place when the 

core (B) is de-magnetized?.344 

31— Does the voltage of a dynamo increase as the speed increases?.337, 344 

32— What would happen to the lamp bulbs if the voltage increased excessively?.337 

33— What method is used to prevent excessive voltage as the speed of engine 

is increased?.337 

34— Would the amperage or quantity of current increase also?.337 

35— Are there methods employed to regulate both the voltage and amperage of 

generators?.337 

36— Name the different methods..337 

37— Name the three classifications of regulating the voltage and amperage of a 

generator?... 343 , 925 

38— What is meant by “inherent constant current regulation”?.343 

39— With this system is the “current output” constant, and does voltage vary 

slightly?. 343 

40— What different systems of regulation may be termed the inherent or “con¬ 
stant current” regulation control?. 343 

41— Explain the principle of the “third brush” regulation method.343 

42— Explain the principle of “bucking series” regulation. 345 

43— For what purpose is the “series field winding” S.E.F.?.345 

44— For what purpose is the “shunt field winding” S.H.F.?. 345 

45— Is there a separate “mechanical regulator” used with this system?...,_345 

46— How and when is the generator connected with battery?. 345 

47— Does the output of generator rise rapidly or gradually after it has gener¬ 
ated its maximum amperage?. 345 

48— Is the amperage kept constant, after reaching its maximum?. 343 

49— Explain how the series coil bucks or opposes the flow of current in the 
“shunt” field coil winding, and what effect this has on generating current ?.345 

50— How and when does the flow of current in the series coil, S.E.F., reverse 

direction, and is this the cause of the series coil S.E.F. bucking or opposing 
the shunt coil S.H.F., instead of assisting it and thus prevent excessive cur¬ 
rent rise?. 345 

51— What other method could be employed to cause the series coil to buck or 

oppose the “shunt” coil?.. 

52— What is meant by a “cumulative” compound winding?. . 345,347 

53— How does the “cumulative • compound winding” differ from the “bucking 

series” regulation?.. 

54— Can the regulation of current of a generator be regulated externally by a 

“mechanical type of regulator”?.. 

55— Explain how.. 342 

































47 

56— What is meant by “voltage regulation”?.345 

57— How does a “voltage regulator,” or “regulating unit,” as it is sometimes 

called, operate? Explain its action.925,345 

58— With a “voltage regulation” system, is the amount of current generated 

dependent upon the state of charge of battery?.925,345 

59— Is the current rate generated by generator higher, when battery voltage is 

low, and low when battery voltage is high?.925,345 

60— What is the difference between a “constant current” regulated generator and 

a “constant voltage” regulated generator?.925,343 

61— How would you adjust to “increase the voltage” of a “voltage regulated 

generator”?.925 

62— How would you adjust to increase the “output” of a “constant current regu¬ 
lated generator,” using the “third-brush” regulation?.925 

63— Briefly explain what takes place when “starting-pedal” is depressed on start¬ 
ing and generating system, shown on page 338, engine supposed to idle....338 

64— Where did starting motor obtain its current to start engine?.338 

65— Where did engine obtain current for ignition to start?.338 

66 — After engine is started and running at a speed of nine or ten miles per hour, 

car speed, what action takes place?...338 

67— Where does the ignition system of engine then obtain current?.338 

68 — Does generator start to charge battery at that time?.338 

69— When engine is running at a very high speed, what device prevents the 

generator from generating an excessive high voltage?.338 

70— Would this method of regulation be termed a “voltage regulation” method?.338 

71— What is the difference between the starting motor method of starting engine 

on page 342 to that on page 338?.342,338 

72— Prom what part of engine is generator usually driven?.341 

73 — what is meant by an “over-running generator clutch,” and where and when 

is it used?.^41 

74 — what kind of a clutch is a “roller type,” and where and when is it used?..341 

75 — could the distributor and timer, or “ignition unit,” as it is termed, be mounted 

on the generator?. 341,342 

76— How would it be necessary to drive it?.341 

77 — what is meant by a “single unit” starting motor, generator and ignition 

system?. 340,343 

78 — What is meant by a “two-unit” starting motor, generator and ignition sys¬ 
tem? .340,343 

7 g—What is meant by a “three-unit starting motor, generator and ignition sys¬ 
tem? . 340,343 

80— How could the “two-unit” system be arranged?. 340,343 

81— How could the “three-unit” system be arranged?.340,343 

82— Why is the term “magneto” ignition sometimes referred to when the system 

is a coil and battery system and direct current only is used?.341 

83— is the “starting, generating and ignition system” explained on pages 343 and 

342 a two-unit system?. 341,342 

84— Name the different parts which make up this system....341, 342 

85 — What voltage is required for starting motor?.343,342 

86 — What make and type of drive is used with this starting motor?.343,342 

87— What kind of starting switch is there used?.343 

88 — Explain the method of starting, and what takes place?.343 
































48 

89— After engine starts, what occurs?.343 

90— Where does generator current go when car speed is ten miles or more per 

hour?...343 

91— What purpose does the “automatic cut-out” serve?.343 

92— What purpose does the “regulator” serve?.343 

93— What type of “regulator” is this called?.343 

94— What is the difference between the “regulator” and “cut-out”?.343 

95— What is meant by the “controller”?.343 

96— What is meant by a “reverse current cut-out”?.344,342,348 

97— Name the parts of the Westinghouse starting, generating and ignition sys¬ 
tem ..346, 347 

98— Why is the regulator used with this system called the “inherent” sys¬ 
tem? .346,343 

98a-Are the terms “relay” and “cut-out” synonymous?...346 

99'—What parts make up the ignition system?.346,347 

100— How is the “ignition unit” driven?.346,347 

101— What is the “ballast resistor” for?.347,348 

102— What is meant by a “mechanical governor control”?.347 

103— What does it control?. 347 

104— Explain the principle and drive method.347 

105— What is the “roller clutch” for?. 347 

106— What is the clutch on governor of generator for?.347 

107— Explain the action of the “mercury type regulator”.347 

108— Does it cut-in and cut-out resistance into the field circuit?.347,380 

109— Can one armature serve for both the generator and the starting motor?... .347 

110— Is it then called a “motor-generator”?.347,352 

111— Name the parts of the Entz motor-generator system.347,352 

112— Is the motor-generator converted into a generator above 600 revolutions per 

minute, and does it serve as a starting motor under 80 revolutions per 
minute?.352 

113— Explain briefly how this is accomplished.r-.352 

114— Where is the U.S.L. “motor-generator” placed on an engine?..347,353 

115— How many windings has the field?.353 

116— What is the action when used as a generator?.353 

117— What is the action when used as a starting motor?.353 

118— What is the voltage of this generator?.353 

119— What kind of a regulation system has the U.S.L. 1914 generator? And explain 

its action.347, 353 

120— What kind of a regulation system is there on the 1915 U.S.L. generator?. .353 

121— What is the purpose of a fuse block?.348 

122— What is a fuse?.428 

123— Is the Westinghouse “timer” (or interrupter) a “closed” or “open” circuit 

type?.251,252 

124— Is the generating system shown on Page 349 a “voltage” regulated system?.349 

125— Explain the purpose, principle and action of the Remy regulation system 

shown on Page 350, and explain what the thermostat is for.350 

126— Carefully study the Gray & Davis motor-generator system.354 

127— Is this a two-unit system?. 354 

128— How is the starting motor applied to engine to start it?.354 

129— Explain briefly the regulation method of generator.354 










































49 

130— What is meant by a “grounded switch” system?... 355 

131— What is meant by a “grounded motor” system?.355 


INSTRUCTION No. 28. 

A Study of Leading Electric Starting and Generating Systems. 


1— What is meant by electrical symbols?.356 

2— What is meant by a single wire system?.356 

3— What is meant by a two-wire system?.356 

4— Make a sketch of the following electric symbols: Positive terminal, negative 

terminal, wires crossing, separate circuits, storage battery, dry cell.356 

5— Make a sketch showing the designation for 6 volt, 3 cell battery.376 

5a-Make a sketch showing two 12 volt batteries connected so they can be charged 

from a 12 volt generator...353 


6—When making the symbol of a storage battery, d.o the long light lines repre¬ 
sent “positive” and the short black lines “negative” terminals or plates? For 
instance, see lower left corner of fig. 1, page 391, hnd make a sketch to desig¬ 
nate a 3 cell battery, assuming that one long line (positive) and one short 


line (negative) comprise a cell.391 

7— Make a symbol which indicates a “ground connection” of a wire to engine or 

frame.356 

8 — Is the electric system on page 357 a “single” or “two wire” system?.357 

9— Is it a “two” or “three unit” system?.357 

10— Explain how you would proceed to “set the timer” on this system.357 

11— How is the fly-wheel marked, and what do marks mean?.357 

12— What make of generator and starting motor is there used on the Overland?. .358 

13— What make of drive system is there used on the starting motor?.359 

14— How is generator driven?.359 

15— How is output of generator controlled?.359 

16— What is the function of the “circuit breaker”?.359 

17— What is the purpose of the “ammeter”?.359 

18— Where is the “switch box” placed?. 359 

19— What does the first “switch button” at top of switch box control?.359 

20— What does the second “switch button” control?.359 

21— What do the third and fourth switch buttons control?.359 

22— What use was made of the fifth switch button (in the old models)?.359 

23— What make of ignition system is used?.359,358,254 

24 — What is the object of the “automatic ignition switch” or “thermostat” used 

with the Connecticut ignition system?.254,358 

25— Is this automatic switch or thermostat placed in the combination switch box 

of the Overland.?.254 

26— State distance the “breaker points” of interrupter and spark plug gap should 

be set.359 

27— State briefly how you would time the ignition.,-359 


28— study the electric systems on pages 360 to 368 inclusive, and clearly get in 
your mind the method of regulation used with generator, the make of ignition 
system and the kind of starting motor drive used. 

29 — What voltage does generator deliver to battery on the Maxwell “25” elec¬ 
tric system?.3 
































50 

30 _What voltage does starting motor use from battery (when starting) on the 

Maxwell .. 3< ^ 7 

31 — How many cells are there in this battery and what is the voltage of the com¬ 
bined cells?...*.. ’ * 3 ^ 

32— When six volts are given to the 12 volt battery by generator, how is this con¬ 
nection made so that the 6 cells are charged at 6 volts?.366 

33 — what make of electric system does the Dodge use, and is it a single or two 

wire system?.369, o<0 

31 _j s the starting motor and generator combined in one unit and does one arma¬ 

ture serve for both generator and starting motor?.369 

35 — How is the motor generator driven?..... 369 

36— Briefly explain how the Dodge starter and generator chain is adjusted.411 

37 _what voltage does the Dodge system employ, and how many cells to the 

battery?...;. 369 

38 —What make of ignition system is used and where located and how driven?..369 

39 _What is “firing order” of engine, and what distance are spark plug gaps set?.369 

40—Explain briefly how you would “time the ignition”.369 

41 _is the regular type of “reverse current cut-out” (as described previously) used 

to connect and disconnect the battery?.370 

42— Is the “cut-out” enclosed in the housing of starting switch?..923 

43 — How is the “output” of generator regulated, or what regulation method is 

used?. 370 

44 — How would you alter the “charging rate” of generator to battery?.370 

45 — what is the “charging rate in amperes”?...923 

40 _Where is the fuse located in generator, and. is it the first place to look in case 

of failure of current supply?.924 

47 _Explain briefly the difference between the “constant voltage” regulated gen¬ 

erator and the “constant current” regulated generator, as exemplified in the 
Bijur make. 925 

48— How would you adjust the Bijur voltage regulator?.925 

49— How would you adjust the Bijur cut-out?. 925 

50— How would you adjust the Bijur constant current regulator?.925 

51 _Explain the action of the “thermostatic control” on the Remy system used 

on the Reo. 371 

52 _How does the starting motor connect with engine (to start) in this system?.371 

53 —what make and. kind of ignition system is used on the Reo?.372,371 

54 _what is the maximum opening of breaker points and what is the proper 

spark plug gap?. 372 

55—How would you set the ignition on the Remy-Reo?.373 


INSTRUCTION No. 28A. 

*Delco Ignition Systems. 

1 _Explain the principle of the early form of Delco ignition system.375 

2 _is the Delco “relay” system similar to the “master vibrator” system, explained 

on page 230, and how does it differ?.375 

3 _is a “succession of sparks” given to start on and only a “single spark” to 

run on? If so, explain how.375,374 

♦The word “Delco” is the manufacturer’s trade name, being- the initial letters of 
their name, Dayton Engineering Laboratories Co., Dayton. Ohio. 




























51 


4— What is the objection to the old style “commutator” for ignition?.375 

5— What device has now taken the place of the old style commutator for igni¬ 
tion? ...375 

6— Does the “timer” give a “single” or “succession” of sparks?.375 

7— Is only one coil used with a timer?.375 


8 — Then, to use only one coil, it is necessary to have a distributor, is it not?.375, 374 

9— Make a sketch, showing the 5 dry cells for source of electric supply, then a 
double wound high tension, non-vibrating coil. Connect the timer and dis¬ 
tributor, showing how four spark plugs would be fired every 180 degree move¬ 
ment of crank shaft or 90 degree movement of brush B, figs. 3 and 4, page. .374 

10— Is the distributor usually placed over the timer, and is the timer and dis¬ 
tributor brush (B) driven by the same shaft?.374,378 

11— Is the timer-distributor shaft sometimes driven from cam shaft and at cam 

shaft speed?.244, 254 

12— Does the cam shaft turn one revolution to two revolutions of crank shaft?-99 

13— Since timer distributor shaft revolves the same speed as cam shaft, how 

many revolutions does the distributor brush B, fig. 3, page 374, make while 
crank shaft makes two revolutions?..99 

13a-Consider this in degrees; while crank shaft is making two revolutions or 720 
degrees, the distributor brush B, would make 360 degrees, or one revolution, 
would it not?.• *99 

In other words, the idea is to impress the importance of knowing that the distributor 
brush (B) and timer cam (D) (page 374, figs. 3 and 4), on a coil and battery system 
always revolve at camshaft speed, or 1 revolution to two of crankshaft. Whereas 
with magneto ignition (page 295), the armature turns the same speed as crankshaft 
on a four-cylinder engine, but 1V 2 times crankshaft speed on a six-cylinder engine 
(usine- a 2-lobe cam), due to the fact that the magneto armature makes only two 
sparks per revolution—however, the distributor on magneto always revolves one 
revolution to two of crankshaft. 


A little study of the subject will make it clear that on a timer we can place “lobes’ 
on the cam, so that as many sparks as are desired can be made during one revo¬ 
lution of crankshaft, and on the distributor, we can place as many segments as 
there are cylinders. We can’t do this with the magneto contact breaker cam with 
only two lobes because the armature of magneto only gives two impulses per 
revolution (unless it is designed to give four, as explained farther on). 

Another po’nt to bear in mind is that the crankshaft must always make two revo¬ 
lutions on a l, 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12-cylinder engine (four cycle), in order to complete its 
cycle evolution (as explained on page 57). 

nn come rnaanetos, however, such as magnetos for airplane work, explained on page 
' thl aTmitSre is designed to give 4 sparks per revolution, therefore, if it gives 

4 snarks pe™?evolution it will give 8 sparks for two revolutions and by using a 4-lobe 
lam or^ the migneto contact breaker, there would be 8 sparks for two revolutions of 
Smatime and 2 revolutions of crankshaft, hence it would turn at crankshaft speed. 

14— Would the timer circuit, figs. 3 and 4, page 374, be an “open” or “closed” 

circuit principle?.* * ‘ V ^ V ‘ V ‘ t ’ 

15— Explain the difference between the “open-circuit” and closed circuit type 

interrupter of the “Delco” make?.* * * " “ ‘'' ’ " ‘ * * * * ’ .7 *. ?/ 8 

16— How is the adjustment of contact points made on Delco ‘ closed-circuit-timer 

.o 78 

.. 

17— To adjust the “open-circuit-timer,” fig. 6, it would be necessary to have 

breaker arm off the cam lobe, would It not? Yes. 

18 — What gap or distance is this space when properly adjusted?.378 

19 — Express in writing, the following dimension (.020 inch).541 

20— What tool is best suited to measure these distances. ... . .^.699 

21— Name the parts of a modern Delco distributor-tuner (fig. 8 ) page. 377 

22 — Is the tifner-distributor shaft driven at V 2 speed of crank shaft?.377 



















52 


23— Is distributor placed above the timer?.377 

24— What is meant by “automatic advance of spark”?.249 

25— How is this accomplished and where is the automatic governor located?.377, 249 

26— Is there a slightly different arrangement of the governor action as used on 

Delco-Cadillac timer-distributor?.132 

27— What occurs as the speed increases?.249,377,132 

28— Does this governor also automatically advance the distributor brush?.249, 377,132 

29— Can the time of spark be advanced, independent of the automatic advance? 
.377, 246, 249, 132 

30— What part does the hand control move?.377,246,249,132 

31— Why is hand control used at all, if spark can be automatically advanced and 

retarded?.246,249,377,307 

32— What range of advance is it possible to get with a timer-distributor, and is 

it more than with a magneto? (foot-note).309 

33— How many lobes or notches would there be in or on the timer shaft used, for 

a six-cylinder engine?.248 

34— How many segments on distributor for a six-cylinder engine?.248 

35— How many for an eight-cylinder engine?.132 

35a-Would it be possible to use a regular magneto type of interrupter and cam 

and revolve the timer and distributor at different speeds, in connection with a 

coil and battery system of ignition?.244 

35b-If cam had but two projections, how many revolutions would it make and how 
many revolutions would distributor brush make to two revolutions of crank 
shaft on a six-cylinder engine?.244 

36— What distance is usually given the spark plug gap with a Delco system?... .378 

37— Where is ignition unit located on the system shown on page 376?.376 

38— How is the timer-distributor driven?.376 

39— What speed does pump shaft revolve?.377,376 

40— Then, if timer-distributor shaft must revolve at half speed of crank shaft, 
then the change could be made in the gear on timer-distributor shaft, fig. 8, 
page 377, so that timer-distributor shaft would turn at half speed, of crank 
shaft, could it not? Yes. 

41— Is the motor generator also driven, in this instance, by the pump shaft?.377 

(Note.—It is of course understood that the pump shaft drives the pump, not shown 
in illustration, and this pump shaft could be driven by gears connected with crank¬ 
shaft gear or camshaft. 

42— Where is the Delco ignition coil located in this instance?.378 

43— Could it be located on the dash or elsewhere if necessary?.376 

44— Is it also called an ignition transformer coil, and is it a regular double wound 

high tension coil without a vibrator?...378 

45— What is the primary winding of coil connected with? Is one end connected 

with timer or interrupter terminal, and does the other contact on timer con¬ 
nect with ignition resistance unit, thence to ground, or frame, thence to nega¬ 
tive (—) battery terminal?.378,376 

46— Does other end of primary winding on coil connect with d.ry cells through 
switch button B, and storage battery or generator, through switch button M?.376 

47— Could current for primary circuit of ignition coil also be taken from' generator 
if speed was high enough? Yes. 

48— In system shown on page 376, does one armature serve for both generator 
and starting motor? (See foot-note, page 386). 

49— When the timer contacts interrupt this primary circuit, what takes place?...378 
























53 


50— What does one end of the secondary winding of this coil connect with?. .378, 376 

51— What part of the distributor d,oes the other end connect with?.376,378, 377 

52— From the center connection of distributor, where does the secondary current 

go?.378,376,377 

53— What is the object of a condenser? Where is it located, and for what pur¬ 
pose? .378 

54— What is the result if condenser is defective?.378 

55— What is the ignition resistance unit for, and how made, and where located?. .378 

56— What is meant by “impedence” of the coil?.378 

INSTRUCTION No. 28B. 

Delco Electric Systems. 

1— Does the Delco electric system employ one armature for the starting motor 

and generator?.381 

2— How many commutators are there, and what is each for?.381 

3— Where can the commutators be located?..381 

4 — Are there two windings on armature, and what for?.381 

5— How many windings are there on the field, and what kind of field poles are 

employed?. 381 

6— Name the two windings on the field poles.381 

7 — What method is employed to drive the Delco motor-generator on page 379?. .379 

8— when starting motor is in operation how does the current flow?.379 

9— Explain briefly the action of the one-way clutch.379,380 

10— How does the starting motor start the engine?.379 

11— State briefly the procedure of starting engine with the system on page.379 

12— What is the purpose of first using the generator as a motor?.379 

13— Is the brush on “starting motor” commutator in action at this time?.379 

14 — After generator armature is revolving slowly, what is the next operation, and 

what takes place?. 379 

15 — is the motor generator brush disconnected as in fig. 2, page 379 and page 380, 
after engine is started, and starting lever placed in normal position again? 

.379,380 

.. 

16 _Are the generator brushes always on contact, and during the period of starting, 

does the armature turn free of shaft driving it, due to the one-way clutch, and 
after motor brush is raised, is the armature then driven by this clutch, and 
does generation of current begin?.. .379,380 

17— Name the different kinds of regulation methods employed on the different 

qoi 

Delco systems.° 

18 — Which method is the one now most popular?.381 

19 _what is the object or purpose of regulating the output of the generator?.380, 381 

20— Name the parts of the “mercury” voltage regulator.380 

21— Explain (briefly) the action of the “mercury” voltage regulator and how it 

regulates the output of generator and when.380 

22— Name the parts of the “variable-resistance” regulator.381,384,383 

23— What does this regulate and what for?...381,384,383 

24— Explain (briefly) the action of the “variable resistance” method of regulating 
the output of generator and state what method and device is used to vary the 
amount of resistance “cut-in” and “out” of the field circuit of gen- 

.383,381,384 

erator. 

25— Is this variable resistance mechanism incorporated in the ignition unit?.. 384, 383 




























54 

26— What is the ignition resistance-unit (D, fig. 3, page 384) for?.383,246,381 

27— Is the timer cam or time of spark automatically advanced at the time the 

resistance is cut-in?. v .383 

28— For what purpose was the “cut-out” used, on the early Delco electric system?.383 

29— Is the “cut-out” eliminated on the later Delco systems?..383 

30— Explain (briefly) the principle now employed to take the place of the “cut¬ 
out” .. 

31— Explain (briefly) the starting operation of the Hudson “six-40”.385 

32— Explain (briefly) the starting operation of the 1918 Hudson.385 

33— Was the variable resistance method (Delco electric system) used on the 

Hudson “six-40”?. 382 

34— What kind of regulation (Delco electric system) was used on the 1918 or 

“super-six” Hudson car?.391 

35— Was the Delco “third brush regulation” used on the Delco motor-generator 

applied, to the Buick D54 and D55?.386 

36— Where was motor generator and also the ignition apparatus located?.386 

37— What three distinct functions does the motor-generator perform?.386 

38— What is meant by “motoring the generator”?.386 

39— When does this operation take place?.386 

40— Why is the “motoring of generator” necessary?. 386 

41— What is the cause of clicking sound heard during the time of “motoring gen¬ 
erator”? .386 

42— What is the purpose of the “generator-clutch”?.386 

43— How is this clutch lubricated, and. how often?.386 

44— What is meant by “cranking operation”?.386 

45— Explain, briefly, what takes place when the cranking operation is per¬ 
formed .386 

46— Should the cranking operation be for as brief a time as possible? Why?-387 

47— Explain, briefly, the action of the ammeter during the cranking operation. .. .387 

48— What should be done the instant engine fires or starts?.387 

49— What is the “motor-clutch” for and where located?.387 

50— How is this clutch lubricated and how often?.387 

51— When the cranking operation is finished, and the starting pedal released, what 

action then takes place?.387 

52— State at what speeds the generator supplies charging current?.387 

53— What parts does the motor-generator consist of?.387 

54— Explain, briefly, the flow of current when cranking and generating.387 

55— How is “direct” current obtained?.387 

56— Explain the principle of the flow of ignition current.389 

57— What is meant by “third-brush” regulation?.389 

58— Explain, briefly, the principle of “third-brush” regulation.389 

59— At what speed is trouble experienced in keeping battery charged?.390 

60— When car is driven at high speed, does this cause generator to produce more 

current?.390 

61— How can the output or amount of current of generator be decreased or in¬ 
creased? .390 

62— Is it necessary to sandpaper the brush each time the position of it is 
changed?..ri.390 

63— State the highest ampere rate the generator should ever be set for.390 

64— Explain, briefly, the method of timing the Delco system on the Hudson.390 







































55 

G5—What is meant by checking the ignition timing?.390 

66— How does the Delco system on page 393, differ from the one on page 

392?..393,392 

67— On page 3S4, the armature has a commutator at each end; state what purpose 

each commutator serves.384 

68— On page 395, where are the motor and generator commutators located?.395 

69— How does this Delco motor-generator differ from the one on page 384?.. .384, 395 

70— How does the Delco system on page 396 differ from the one on page 388?.396, 388 

INSTRUCTION No. 28C. 

Care, Tests and Adjustments of Delco Electric Systems. 

1— Name the five principal places to lubricate the Delco electric system, and 

bow often. 397 

2— In the Delco system using “variable resistance” method of regulation, are the 

resistance spools individually suited for different generators?.397 

3— How would you test the output of generator?..397 

4— In the Delco system which used, a “cut-out,” what must be kept in mind when 

adjusting?. 398 

5— How is the Delco generator clutch removed?.398 

6— How would you test for a defective condenser?.398 

7— How would you test for a defective coil?....398 

8— What is the result if there is a short-circuit in the secondary winding?.398 

9— How would you test the accuracy of an ammeter?.398 

10— Can a volt meter and an ammeter be combined in one instrument?.398,414 

11— How many amperes and. how many volts should the scale maximum readings 

provide for, on a good instrument?. 398,414 

12— Explain what the parts consist of and what parts move?.398 

13— Explain the principle of the ammeter shown at bottom of page 414 and state 

how it differs from the one on page 398.414,398 

14 — what is the purpose of an ammeter and how is it placed in the circuit?. .415, 417 

15 — Does it show the quantity of current consumed by the starting motor?.... .415 

16 — Could you test a storage battery with an ammeter by placing the terminals 

directly across the battery?. 399 

17 — when does ammeter needle indicate that battery is being charged and dis¬ 
charged? .415,417 

18 — What is the purpose of a volt-meter?... .414, 453, 399 

19 _Can a volt meter be connected directly across the battery terminals, as shown 

in diagram B, page 416?. 416 

20— Could you also test the voltage of each cell, as shown in diagram A, by con¬ 
necting voltmeter with terminals of each cell?.416 

21— Could you also test for an open circuit, per diagram I, or test a coil for a 

ground, per K, with a volt-meter?. 416 

22 _if you were to test with an ammeter by placing it across the terminals of a 

* battery, it would, damage ammeter, would it not?.399 

23 _Then, for an ammeter to be used to indicate the ampere discharge, up to the 

capacity of the ammeter (say it is designed for 30 amperes) then it would be 
placed in “series” and would indicate the quantity of current passing in the 
wires, as in fig. 1, page 391, would it not?.415 

24 _if you desired, to test the ampere capacity of a battery higher than that of 

the capacity of the meter, is there a “shunt” used?.414 





























56 


25 — What is a “shunt” for; what is it made of, and how connected with an 

ammeter? .. . 

25a~What is meant by a shunt winding?... 333 > 335 > y45 

The “shunt” used with an ammeter has no relation to the shunt winding’, but this 
question is asked in order to distinguish the two. When an external shunt is usea 
in connection with an ammeter (page 416), it will be noted that the connection is a 
“shunt connection,” or across the line. 

26— How would you test the voltage of a storage battery?.399, 453 

27— Make a sketch showing how you would connect a volt-meter to test a single 

cell of a battery? . 416 

27a--Make a sketch showing how you would connect volt-meter to test all the cells 
of battery.• .. 416 

28— Make a sketch showing how you would test the voltage of a generator.414 

29— Make a sketch showing how you would test a generator with a volt-meter to 

see if coil in armature is open-circuited or short-circuited.402 

30— How would you test a dry cell with a volt-meter or, ammeter?.241 

31— It would make no particular difference if you tested a dry cell with an ammeter 

if the amperage capacity of battery was below the range of the meter. 
Would it? . 399 

32— Make a sketch showing how you would test the adjustment of vibrator on a 

high tension or induction coil with a special low reading ammeter,.234 

33— What are test points for?.• .. 399 

34— How would you make a set?. 399 

35— Make a sketch showing how you would connect same to a circuit.399 

36— Is the lamp in series with the points and must the points touch to cause 

lamp to light? . 399 

37— What is meant by “counter-electro-motive-force”? ..399 

38— How does this affect the first reading of an ammeter?.399 

40— When “motoring” generator and ignition button is pulled out, what should 

ammeter indicate in amperes? ..400 

41— Suppose the armature did not revolve when “motoring” the generator, what 

would likely be the cause? .400 

42— If ammeter vibrates at each revolution of armature during time of “motoring- 

generator,” with engine running at low speed, what is evident?...400 

43— How does the current flow and from what source when cranking the engine ?.400 

44— Is the shunt field current necessary when performing this operation?.400 

45— How much average power is consumed when cranking?...400 

46— What are “cranking” or starting failures due to?.400 

47 — when cranking, what voltage should the three-cell battery show if specific 

gravity registers 1,200 or more? .••.400 

48— What is likely the trouble if starter, lights and horn all fail?.401 

49— What is likely the trouble if lights, horn and ignition are OK. but engine fails 

to start? .••.401 

50— If starter fails to start, or starts slowly, and lights go out, or get very dim 

while starting, what is likely the trouble?.401 

51— If engine fires properly on “M” button but not on “B” button, what is likely 

the trouble? ..401 

52— If engine works OK. on “B” button, but. not on “M” button, what is likely 

the trouble? .401 

53— If both systems of ignition fail and supply of current from both the storage 

battery and dry cells is OK., what is likely the trouble?.401 































57 

54— What are buttons “M” and “B” for?.382 

55— Explain what is meant by “cranking engine” and how does the current flow 

in this instance (Delco) ? ...400 

56— What is likely the cause if starter motor fails to start? .404 

57— When testing for short-circuits or grounds in the armature windings, or motor 

armature, are brushes raised and cardboard inserted? If so, what for?.402 

58— How would you proceed to test for a grounded generator coil?.402 

59— How would you proceed to test for a grounded motor coil?.402 

60— How would you proceed to test for a short-circuit between motor and generator 

armature coils ?. 402 

61— How would you test for open or short-circuited generator coils?.402 

62— How would you test the high tension ignition coil?. ........402 

63— How would you test for grounds?.403 

64— How would you test for short-circuits between two wires?.403 

65— How would you test for open circuit in a field coil?.403 

66 — How would you test for grounds in a field coil? .403 

67— How many commutators has the Delco armature?.404 

68 — What are the troubles which commutators are subject to? .404, 409 

69— What is the result when mica protrudes ?.404 

70— What is the mica for? .404 

71— What is the cause of the mica protruding or “high-mica”?.404, 409 

72— How would you remedy the trouble?.404, 409 

73— What are some of the causes of commutator noises?.404 

74— How can the noise sometimes be eliminated?. 404 

75— Of what material are generator brushes usually made? (foot-note).408, 405 

76— Of what material are generator brushes usually made for starting motors? 

(foot-note) ...325 

77— When fitting Delco Motor brushes, what is necessary to do?.404 

78— Name the faults of brushes and brush holders?. 408 

79 — When brush spring tension fails what is the cause and result?.408 

80— When brushes stick, what is the result and remedy?.408 

81— What causes brush holders to overheat?. 408 

82— What causes sparking at the brushes?.409 

83— How would you clean carbon dust from lower part of generator?.409 

84— How would you proceed to keep a commutator smooth?.409,404 

85— How would you clean a greasy commutator?.409 

86 — How would you dry out a damp or wet motor-generator?.409 

87— What are the symptoms, when generator does not generate full output?.409 

88 — What is the cause?.409 

89— Name the two arrangements of Delco third-brush.405 

90— Plow is the charging rate increased?.405 

91— How is the charging rate decreased?. 405 

92— How is the overcharging of a battery indicated? .• •.405 

93 — if a driver uses his car a great deal at night and very little in daytime, how 

much of a charging rate should he have?.405 

94 _How would you adjust the third-brush of Delco generator where third-brush is 

over the commutator? .405 

95— Are carbon brushes used on Delco generators? Why? .405 

96 — What kind of brush is used on Delco starting motor?.405 













































58 

97 — How would you test for a dirty or rough commutator?. 406 

98— How would you clean a commutator?. 406 

99— State, briefly, how to clean various metals. 401 

INSTRUCTION No. 29. 

Care, Adjustment and Tests of Electric Starting, Generating and Lighting Systems. 

1— Is the starting motor used as much as the generator?.407 

2— How often should you oil the starting motor, and what kind of oil?.407 

3 — what care should you give the-commutator?. 407 

4 — what care should you give the brushes?. 407 

5— What is likely the trouble if starting motor fails to start?.407 

6— if engine does not pick up after starter turns engine crank over a few times, 

what is likely the trouble?.. 

6a-If starting motor fails to start the engine, how would you proceed to test for 
the trouble?.. 407 

7 — if starter only cranlcs engine slow, what is the cause?.408 

8— if starter does not rotate at all, what is the cause?.408 

9— If starter rotates, but does not start engine, what is the cause?.408 

10— If starter cranks engine few revolutions and stops, what is the cause?..-408 

11 — What are some of the causes of a weak starting motor?...408 

12 — What is a “cut-out” or “relay” for?.342 

13— What is likely the trouble if cut-out fails to operate?. ...409 

14— Name the mechanical reasons why cut-out fails to operate?.409 

15 — Name the electrical reasons why cut-out fails to operate?. ...409 

16— How would you determine if cut-out was working properly?.411 

17 — How would you proceed to test if you thought cut-out was not operating 

properly?.....410 

18— How would you tighten the silent chain which drives the motor-generator on 

the Dodge?.411 

19— What places would, you first look for generator troubles?...411 

19a-What would likely be the cause of a burned-out and grounded armature?.411 

20— Where are armature troubles sometimes found?.411 

20a-What is the meaning of torque?. 864 

2 1— How would you determine if the torque was even or not?.411 

22— If armature is burned out or there is broken connection, what will this cause 

armature to do?. 411 

23 — state another method of testing for defective armature coils?.411 

24 — No current from generator, may be due to what?.411 

25 — What would cause a “grounded” generator?...412 

26— What is the cause and result of weak field magnets?. .412 

27 — what would a defective or short-circuited circuit-breaker (cut-out) result in?.412. 

28— What is meant by a short-circuit?.412 

29— What is meant by a “dead” short-circuit?. 412 

30— What is meant by a “slight” short-circuit?.412 

31— What is meant by a “ground”?. 412 

32— What is a fuse for?.412,428 

33— What is a fuse wire made of?....412, 428 

34_What are the indications of a ground or short-circuit?.413 

35 —state some of the causes of short-circuits and grounds.413 










































59 


36— What is meant by an “internal short-circuit”?.413,456 

37— Where would you look for “grounds”?..413 

38— How would you proceed to test for “grounds” or “short-circuits”?... .413, 415, 418 

39— What is meant by an “open circuit,” and what is the result?.415 

40— How can “open circuits” be located?.415,418 

41— W'hat is the purpose of an ampere meter?..415 

42— How would, it indicate an “open circuit”?.417 

43— Would the blowing or melting of a fuse result in an “open-circuit”?.415, 419, 408 

44— If fuse melted, what is the cause and how would you proceed to locate it? 

Would you then put in another fuse?.....419 

45— State the two classes of ammeter troubles?.417 

46— At what average speed of car should ammeter show “charge”?...417 

47— At what average speed, of car should ammeter show “discharge”?...4l7 

48— W'hat takes place when ammeter shows “discharge”?.417 

49— What takes place when ammeter shows “charge”?.417 

50— Does the “cut-out” cut the generator into battery when ammeter shows 

“charge,” and cut it out, when ammeter shows “discharge”?.417 

51— What would indications be if a battery was connected wrong to generator? 

. 417,421 

52— If high candle-power lamps are used, will this consume more current or 

amperes?. 417 

53— If the ammeter itself failed to operate, what would likely be the trouble?-419 

54— Name some of the causes of starting and lighting troubles.419 

55— What parts of the electric system would these causes affect?...419 

56— If lamps do not light, state probable reasons.419 

57— If lights are dim, state probable reasons. 419,420 

58— If some of the lamps light up, but others do not, what would probably be the 

cause?. 420 

59— If fuses “blow” often, state probable reasons.420 

60— If lamps go out for an instant only, what is probable cause?.420 

61— If lights burn dim when starting motor is used, what is the probable cause?.420 

62— If lamps flicker, what is the probable cause?. 420 

63— Read the matter on page 421, relative to reversal of battery terminals to gen¬ 
erator; also see page..925 

64— What is the symbol for positive terminal of a battery?. .421 

65 — what is the symbol for negative terminal of a battery?.421 

66— What is the color of a positive terminal of a storage battery?.421 

67_what is the color of a negative terminal of a storage battery?.421 

68— How would you test which was negative or positive terminal of an electric 

wire if it was not marked?. 452 

69 — Will a poor contact of battery wire, which is grounded, cause dim lights? 

(foot-note).421- 

70— State the different causes of a battery not holding its charge?. .....422 

71— What are the indications of a run-down or weak battery?.422 

72 — is there more trouble with battery in winter than in summer? Why? (foot¬ 
note) . 422 






































60 


INSTRUCTION No. 30. 

Wiring a Car. 

1 — What is meant by a single-wire or “grounded return” system?.425* 426 

2— What is meant by a “two-wire” system?..425* 426 

3 — what is meant by a “three-wire” system?., ’ 

4 — What is meant by the “neutral” wire, when used with a “three-wire system, 

and what purpose does it serve?... 426 

5 — What is a coupling box . 

6 — What is a junction box for?. 426 

7— What is a conduit for?. 420 

8 — What is a flexible steel armored cable for?. 240 

9 — Name the kinds of wire used on a car?.425* 240 

10 — What is primary wire used for?..425* 240 

11 — What is secondary cable used for?.425* 426 

12 — How is the wire insulated,?...' 9C 

13 — what kind of wire is used for a starting motor, and why large.. 

14 _is a large quantity of current consumed for a moment, when starting engine, 

and is this virtually short-circuiting the battery ?... 427 ’ 827, 4 

15 — During this period would battery be “overloaded”?. 

16— is a fuse used to protect a storage battery if its wires to starting motor become 

short-circuited?... 4#8 ’~* 

17 — what would happen if left shorted, for several hours?. 

18— Explain how a storage battery of 120 ampere-hour capacity can deliver 475 

.427,327 

amperes.. 

19 _what is meant by grounding a wire, and how should a grounded connection 

, , 0 .426,428,240 

be made?.. •. 

20—How should wires connecting to battery terminals be treated. 4 8 

2 i_Are wires running from generator to battery smaller than wires from battery 

to starting motor? Why?. 42 ^ 

22 — Read the list of sizes of wire to use, on page. 425 

497 

23— State some of the wiring troubles. 

24— What are fuses for?. 428 

25— Where are they placed?. 428 

26— Name the different types of fuses.- 428 

27 _if a fuse “blows” or melts, what is the result, and what should you then do? 

.428,419 

28 _What capacity or size fuse should there be used for side lights and head 

lights?. 428 


INSTRUCTION No. 31. 

Lighting a Car. 

1 — State the different methods for lighting a car. 

2 — what can-the gas light be produced from?.... 

3 — What sources can electric lights be produced from?. 

4 — what lights are required by law?. 

5 — State the different methods for lighting a car with electric lights 

6 _What is meant by candle-power, and how is it expressed?. 

7 — Does a reflector increase the brilliancy of a light?. 

8 — What does it do?.• .. 


.431 

.431 

.431 

.431 

.431 

.431 

.431 

.431 









































61 

9—What voltage lamp is generally used?...431 

10— What governs the amperage or quantity of current consumed by the lamp 

bulb?.431 

11— What is meant by Watts?...431 

12— Where are different lamps placed, and state different c.p.431 

13— What is meant by a “carbon filament” lamp? (foot-note).431 

14— Name the two types of lamp bulbs generally used.432 

15— What is meant by a “vacuum” lamp?. 432 

16— W T hat is meant by a “gas filled” or “nitrogen” lamp?.432 

17— Is the nitrogen, or “Mazda C” lamp used mostly for headlights?.432,434 

18— Is the gas filled lamp sensitive to an increased voltage? (foot-note).432 

19— What voltage lamps are used, and how are they connected for use on the 

Ford, magneto?. 434 

20— What is a lamp base?. 432 

21— Name the different types of lamp bases. 432 

22— What is meant by a S.C. and D.C. base?.432,434 

23— Which type of base is used most?. 432 

24 — what does the light you get on the road depend upon?.432 

25— What is meant by focusing a lamp bulb?. .432 

26— State, briefly, the different methods for focusing the lamps.432 

27 — what type reflector is used in most headlamps?. 433 

28— Suppose a lamp bulb was used without a reflector, how would, the light be 

thrown?. 433 

29 — What is the advantage of a reflector?.433 

30— What is meant by a “ray” of light?. 433 

31— What is meant by a “beam” of light?.... 433 

32 — What is one of the fundamental laws of light?.. 433 

33— What is meant by “angle of incidence”?.433 

34 — What is meant by “angle of reflection”?.433 

35— How is the angle of light striking the reflector controlled?.433 

36— What is meant by the “focal or focus point”?...433 

37— What is meant by the “light source”?.433 

38— Explain what is meant by a “straight beam,” and where is lamp filament 

placed?. 433 

39 _Explain what is meant by a “spreading beam,” and where is lamp filament 

placed?. 433 

4 Q_Explain what is meant by a “crossed beam,” and where is lamp filament 

placed?. 433 

44 _What part of the light, leaving a reflector is the part which produces glare?.433 

42— State, briefly, some of the methods for reducing glare?.433 

43 — State briefly the difference between a “diffusing” lens and a “deflecting lens” 

’..433, 429 

44 _When a diffusing type lens is used what kind of a beam is best?.435, 429 

45 —How would you determine if a lamp bulb was set for a spreading or crossed 

beam?. 435 

Read pages 435 and 429 carefully. 

46 _How are electric headlamps usually opened?.437 

47 —Name the two methods of lighting a car by gas.... 437 

4 g_what is a pressure gas storage tank used for, and what kind of gas is it?.. .438 

49 —what is meant by “ATM”?. 438 

Read page 439 carefully. 









































62 


INSTRUCTION No. 32. 

Storage Batteries. 

1 — Do storage batteries actually store electricity when charged from some out¬ 
side source?.441,447 

2— What does actually take place when being charged?. 447 

3— What does actually take place when being discharged?.447 

4— How is a storage battery charged?...447 

5— Must “direct” current only, be used for charging?.447,459 

6 — What is the object of charging?.447 

7— Name the parts of a storage battery. 442,445 

8 — Name the two kinds of plates and state which is used most.445 

9— What is the “grid” for, and what made of?.445 

10— What are “grids” pasted with?. 445 

11— What is a “lug”?.445 

12— What is meant by a “group of plates”?.445 ' 

13— What are “straps” for?. 445 

13a-What are “separators,” and why are they necessary?.445 

14— What is the “element”?.t..445 

15— What does “electrolyte” consist of?.445,448 

16— What is the “jar” for?...445 

17— Why is a “vent” used?...445 

18— How is the “positive terminal” marked, and what color?.445 

19— How is the “negative terminal” marked, and what color?.... ..445 

20— What is meant by a “cell”?.445 

21— How many volts should each normal cell give?.....443,447,440 

22— What is meant by “forming” the plates?.447 

23— What takes place during this “forming” process?....447 

24— Is water lighter or less dense than acid?.447,449 

25— Would a glass bulb or tube, air tight, with a weight in one end (to cause it 
to stand upright in the water) sink deeper in water than if placed in acid?. .447 

26— The amount of acid in the water would then determine just how deep or far 

the tube would sink, would it not?...447 

27— Then the proportion of acid to that of water (or the density of the solution) 

would govern its specific gravity, would it not?.447 

28— The glass tube could then be graduated, showing the different depths it would 

sink, due to the density, could it not?. 447 

29— By what name is such a tube known?.447,450,451 

30— The hydrometer could then be enclosed in a syringe and specific gravity of the 

electrolyte or solution tested by drawing the solution from battery in the 
syringe, per fig. 15, page 450, could it not?..450 

31— What is meant by the abbreviations “SG” and “sp. gr.”?. 447 

32— What is meant by “specific gravity”?... 447,449 

33— When a battery cell is being used, and as discharge progresses, does the elec¬ 

trolyte solution become weaker and less dense, and does the acid go into the 
plates?. 447 

34— Then when fully discharged most of the acid would be in the plates and the 

solution would be almost plain water, would it not?. 447 

35 — What is the specific gravity of water?. 447,449 





































63 


36— If we put a hydrometer in the solution of a discharged battery, would it sink 

deeper than in the solution of a charged battery? Why?....447,450 

37— What is the average specific gravity of the solution of a discharged battery? 

... .447,450 

Note the deeper hydrometer sinks in the solution, the less the specific gravity, or 
nearer to the specific gravity of water (1000). See page 450. 

38— When a battery is being charged is the acid returned to the electrolyte or 

solution, from the plates, and does it begin to get denser with acid?.447 

39— What is the average specific gravity of the electrolyte when battery is fully 

charged?. 447,450 

40— If a hydrometer is placed in the electrolyte of a charged battery, it does not 

sink as deep, as in the solution of a discharged battery, does it?...447 

41— Would the reading or scale on hydrometer then indicate a higher specific 

gravity?. 447,450 

42— Should the gravity test within 25 points in each cell?.450 

43— What is meant by points?.449 

44— If the hydrometer reading should be considerably lower in one cell than 

another, what would it indicate?.....453 


Electrolyte. 

45—What is “electrolyte” composed of, and where is it used in a battery?.448 

45 a-What is “concentrated” sulphuric acid, and what is its specific gravity?.448, 449 

45 b-What is meant by “eighteen-thirty-five”?.449 

45c-Would a battery operate with acid alone, as a solution?.448 

45d-Then how is it diluted?.448 

45e-How is electrolyte prepared?.448,449,458 

45f—State 7 precautions you would take in preparing electrolyte..449 

45g-Should the acid always be poured into the water?.458,449 

45h-Should the electrolyte be cooled before placing in the cells?.458 

45i-Will acid from a storage battery, damage clothing, and what is the remedy?.458 
45 j -What proportion of water (volume) would there be used to 1 part sulphuric 

acid (1835 s.g.) if a solution of 1300 s.g. is desired? (table)...448 

45k-What is meant by “chemically pure acid” or “CP”?.449 

451—What is the usual method of determining the strength of electrolyte?.449 

45m-What is meant by a “pilot cell”?...449 

45n-Does the actual proportion of water in the electrolyte slightly affect the 

“gravity” independently of the state of charge?.449 

45o-Is it necessary (to properly test electrolyte), to make “temperature correc¬ 
tions,” if temperature is above or below 70 degrees Fah.?.449 

45p-After reassembling of battery after repairing or overhauling, is new electro¬ 
lyte added?. 470 

45q-Does condition of plates govern the specific gravity of the electrolyte?.470 

45r-If new “elements” are used what specific gravity of solution would be used?.470 
45 s-If “old plates and new separators” are used, would electrolyte be higher than 

the old electrolyte?.470 

45t —If “old plates and old separators” are used, what would, be the gravity of the 

solution?. 470 

45u-Suppose a battery had been repaired and cleaned out, and new separators 
used and new solutions of 1250 specific gravity added to each cell, and charg¬ 
ing started, would the specific gravity of the acid rise or drop?.470 





























64 


46—Why would it drop?... 4 

46a-Would it rise again, after continued charging, and to what point, or specific 


gravity?. 470 

46b-If the specific gravity only showed. 1200 s.g., after fully charging, would 

stronger acid then be added?...470 

46c-If the battery is in a discharged state, and new solution was added, what is 

the result?.... 470 

46d-What should specific gravity be of the solution put into a charged, battery?..470 
46e-How many hours after filling battery cells with electrolyte, should charging 

be started?. 4 70 

46f-Should charging then be at one-half the normal rate, and for what length of 

time?. 47 0 

46g-If new elements, how many hours will be required?.470 


46h-If old plates which are badly sulphated or dried out, how long a time will 


be required.?.470 

46i —If only one cell is repaired, should the other two cells be discharged? Why?.470 
46j-What is meant by “adjusting gravity”?.471 




Temperature. 

47— What is meant by “gassing,” and what is the cause and result if excessive? 

. 447,448 

48— W T hat is the effect of overcharging?. 448 

49— What is the effect of low temperature on a battery?.448 

50— WTiat is the effect of high temperature on a battery?. 448 

51— What is the effect of an over-discharge?.448 

52— What is the effect of an overcharge?. 448 

53— Should the temperature of a battery cell be permitted to go above 110 degrees 

Fah.?..448, 460, 461, 464 

53a-Suppose the temperature exceeds 110 degrees Fah., what is the result?.448 

53b-Does electrolyte expand when heated?..449 

53c-Does the strength of the solution change if heated?.449 

53d-Does the specific gravity change if heated?...449 

54— What causes heating in a battery?...448 

55— Is it necessary (to properly test electrolyte) to make temperature corrections, 

if temperature is above or below 70 degrees Fah.?.449 

55a-What is meant by “temperature corrections”?.449 

56— What is this standard temperature?...449 

57— Suppose conditions were such that you could not test the electrolyte when 

its temperature was 70 degrees Fah., what method would you adopt in order 
to tell?. 449 

58— Suppose temperature of electrolyte was 100 degrees Fah., and hydrometer 

reading showed 1.275 S.G., what would be the actual specific gravity?.449 

59— Suppose the temperature of electrolyte was 40 degrees Fah., and hydrometer 
showed a reading of 1.235 S.G., what would be the actual specific gravity?.. .449 

60— Is there a special thermometer which could be used, and which would show 

these variances? Explain its principle. 450,449 

Battery Tests. 

61— What is the specific gravity of a fully charged battery?.451 

62— What is the specific gravity of a three-quarter charged battery?.451 
































65 

63— What is the specific gravity of a one-half charged battery?.451 

64— What is the specific gravity of a fully discharged battery?. 451 

65— When battery is used, for starting motor, what is the lowest gravity test 

battery should be permitted, to go? (foot-note).451 

66 — Then how many points range would this allow? (foot-note). 45 l 

67— When taking a hydrometer reading should the electrolyte be put back in the 

same cells?. 451 

68 — When should the hydrometer readings be taken?.451 

69— Is the hydrometer reading accurate, immediately after adding water?...451 

70— Why is water added, and what causes evaporation?....454 

71— What kind of water is used, and why should water which comes from metal 

roofs not be used.?. 455 

72— How would you proceed to add water?... 454 

73— Is acid ever added?.455,454,470 

74— Suppose electrolyte is spilled from battery, what is used to replace?.473 

75— What is meant by electrolyte level?. 454 

76— Will the solution in a battery freeze? If so, when?.451 

77— If the electrolyte should become frozen, what is sometimes the result?.451 

78— What is the procedure to renew battery if it is frozen?.....451 

79— What is the best plan to avoid, freezing?.451 

80— Is the volt meter often us,ed for testing battery?.453,460 

81— When, and how?...453,460 

82— Can the voltmeter be used to tell the positive and negative pole of battery? 

How?.453 

83— Is the voltmeter only suitable for telling condition of battery when it is dis¬ 
charging? . 453 

84— What other methods are there for finding the positive and negative poles 

(polarity) of a battery or electric wires?.452 

85— What is meant by the ampere-hour capacity of a battery?.441 

86 — What is the ampere-hour capacity dependent upon?..441 

87— Will a battery have a greater ampere-hour capacity if discharged, at a lower 

rate?.441 

88 — How would you tell when a storage battery needs recharging?.453 

88 a-What is the lowest specific gravity battery should test if used for starting 

motor, lights and ignition?. 453 

89— What is the lowest specific gravity battery should go if used for ignition and 

lights only?. 453 

90— Why is an open flame dangerous around a battery when it is charging?.454, 458 

91— Why should a battery be charged, immediately after adding water during cold 

weather?.454 

92— If battery is not to be used for a considerable time what precaution is neces¬ 
sary? . 455 

93— Why does a battery develop more trouble in winter than summer? (foot-note) .422 


INSTRUCTION No. 32A. 
Storage Battery Troubles and Repairs. 


1 — What is meant by sulphating of battery plates?.456 

2 — What is the cause of sulphated plates?...456 

3— What care should the battery terminals have?.456,428 



































66 


4— What will poor connections of battery result in? (foot-note).421,457 

5— Name the two kinds of battery short-circuits which might occur..456 

6 — What is likely the cause of an “internal short-circuit”?.......456 

7— What is likely the cause of an “external short-circuit”?.456 

8 — Where does sediment collect in a battery?..456 

9— What causes this sediment, and what is the result?...456,458 

10— What are the indications of sediment, and how is it overcome?.456 

10a--When there is a large sediment deposit what is likely the cause?.458 

11— What is meant by “buckling” or “warping” of plates?.456 

12— How does this affect the battery?. 456 

13— What are some of the causes of plates buckling or warping?.456,458 

14— How would you care for a battery to prevent it from buckling or warping?.457 

15— If the starting motor does not start engine promptly and lights burn dim, 

and there is missing of explosion, what would likely be the cause?.457 

16— How would, you determine if battery was at fault?.457 

17— When lights burn bright, but starting motor will not crank engine, what is 

likely the trouble?.457 

18— Should the specific gravity of the solution in one cell be lower than in 

others?.457,458 

19— What would likely be the cause?. .457 

20— What is the remedy?.457,458 

21— If one cell is dead, what is likely the cause?. 458 

22— If a jar is broken, what is the result?.457 


23—What is the cause of a cracked battery jar, and can it be repaired?.458, 471, 473 


24— What is meant by a “double voltage” system? (foot-note).45? 

25— If the battery is constantly low, what is likely the cause and remedy?... .458 

26— If the battery exhausts quickly while idle, what is likely the . cause and. 

remedy?....458 

27— If the battery will not take a charge, what is likely the cause and remedy?.458 

28— If the battery plates are “buckled,” what is likely the cause and remedy?.458 

29— If one cell is dead, what is likely the cause?.458 

30— If separators are punctured, what is likely the cause?......458 

31— If electrolyte s.g. is down to 1.100 what is likely the cause?.458 

Head pages 458-459 carefully. 


Battery Charging. 

32— When charging, is it important to connect positive terminal of battery with 

positive terminal of charging wire?... 459 

33— Suppose by mistake, the terminals were connected wrong and. a “reversed” 
charge took place, what would be the procedure to overcome this trouble ?.459 

34— Should direct current only be used for charging a battery?.459 

35— What rate of charge should a battery be started with?.459,467,461 

36— What indication shows that battery should then be given normal or finish 

rate?..459,467 

37— When is a battery charge complete, and how would you determine if you 

had no voltmeter or hydrometer to test?.459,460,464 

38— What is meant by a 24-hour rate of charge?. 459 

39— Is it best to charge a battery at a low rate for a long period of time?.460 

40— If charged at a high rate, what is the result?.460 

41— What should the specific gravity of the electrolyte be at the end of charge?.461 


































67 


42— What will the voltage be (approximately) of a cell at end of charge, with 

current flowing at minimum rate?..461 

43— How would you use a hydrometer to test during a charge?.460 

44— If specific gravity shows 1.275 to 1.300 and. battery gases freely, then is the 

Charge reduced?.460,461 

45— If the S.G. does not rise above 1.250, is the battery probably old?.460 

46— Suppose the battery plates are sulphated, how would you proceed to charge 

it?. 461 

47— Explain what is meant by normal and abnormal sulphate?.448 

48— Could a battery be charged from a 110 volt “direct current” light circuit?.460, 461 

49— Is it necessary to use resistance?....460, 461 

50— What kind of resistance can there be used,?.461,463,460 

51— Make a sketch showing how you would charge a single battery, using 32 c.p. 

lamps, to charge at 10 amperes.460 

52— Suppose you wished to reduce the charge to 5 amperes, how many 32 c.p. 

lamps would you use?. 460 

53— How many amperes does a 32 c.p. carbon filament lamp allow to pass?....460 

54— What part of an ampere does a 16 c.p. carbon filament lamp allow to pass?.460 

55— Make a sketch showing how you would charge 11 batteries at one time, using 

lamp resistance. 460 

56— Why is it necessary to use more lamps when charging more batteries?... .460 

57— What rate of charge is best to charge several batteries at one time?.460 

58— Suppose some of the batteries are smaller and some are only partially dis¬ 
charged, and others fully discharged, how would you regulate the charge?..460 

59— If you had an ammeter in the circuit during the charge, how is it connected, 

and what does it indicate?. 460 

60— What instruments can there be used to test with, during the charge?.*.460 

61— How would you determine when battery is charged, with a volt-meter?.460 

62— How would you determine when a battery was charged, with a hydrometer?.460 

63— Could you charge batteries from a 220 volt “direct current circuit,” if so, 

would you use more lamps than on a 110 volt circuit?.461,460,465 

64— Why?. 461,460 

65— Could you charge a battery from a 500 volt “direct current circuit”? If so, 

would you use more lamps than on a 110 or 220 volt circuit?.461,465 

66— Why?. 461,465 

67— what is a rheostat for, and how constructed?.460,474,464,463 

68— Could water be used for resistance?...463 

69— What is a “resistance” unit?.463,464 

70— What is a “resistance” unit made of?...464 

71— is resistance referred to as “ohms”?.464 

71a-What is meant by an “ohm”?.863,207 

72_Are these “resistance units” then measured in so many “ohms” capacity?. .464 

73— How hi any “ohms” resistance is there required for charging a 3 cell battery 

at a 3 ampere rate?. 464 

74— How many ohms resistance is there required for charging two 3 cell batteries 

at a 3 ampere rate?.. 464 

75_Suppose you had two resistance units of full 15 ohms capacity each, giving 

a total of 30 ohms, are there “taps” or connections provided whereby only 
part or all of the resistance can be thrown into the circuit?.464 
































68 


76— When connection clamp is at A, fig. 11, is all the resistance in the circuit, 

and is there less current flowing through battery?.464 

77— When connection or clamp is at F, is there a less amount of resistance in 

the circuit, and is the charging rate greater?...464 

78— When connection is at J, how many ohms resistance is there in the circuit?.464 

79— As the resistance is cut out, the charging rate is higher. Is it not?.464 

80— The more batteries in series the less resistance to be used,. Is this correct? 

Why?......464 

81— How are batteries connected when there are more than one battery to 

charge?. 464,462 

82— Is the positive pole of one battery connected to the negative pole of the next, 

and so on?. 464 

83— Is the positive and negative terminal of battery connected with the positive 

and negative terminal of charging circuit?. 464 

84— As the batteries become charged will the charging rate become less?.464 

85— If so, how would you increase the charge, when using resistance units?...464 

86 — How would you tell when battery was charged?....464 

87— If one battery becomes charged before the others do, what is necessary to do? 

. 464,460 

88 — Can a storage battery be charged from an alternating current circuit?.463 

89— What is a rectifier for?..463 

89a-What is a mercury arc rectifier for?...463 

(Note.—The General Electric Co., Schenectady, N. Y. (Supply Dept.), now supply 
what is known as a f ‘Tungar Rectifier.”) 

90— Could water and acid be used as a rectifier?.463 466 

(Note.—The solution used in rectifier, fig. 22, page 466, is a concentrated solution of 
common baking powder and pure water. 


4 , 

91— When charging with a rectifier is it important to have positive terminal of 
battery connected with positive terminal of charging wire? Ans. Yes; on all 
types of rectifiers except one type of vibrator rectifier. 

92— What is a motor-generator set for?...462 

93— What does it consist of?.462 

94— Suppose you had a 3 cell, 6 volt battery and the headlights were 6 volt, but 

tail light and dash light 3 volt;.make a sketch showing how you would connect 
same..466 

95— Suppose you had a 9 cell, 18 volt battery and you wished to obtain 6 volts at 

the battery terminals, how would you connect the cells?.466 

96— Would the ampere capacity of the combined cells be greater, if the 9 cells 

were connected for 6 volts, than if connected for 18 volts?.466 

Read ‘‘Battery Connections” carefully on page 466. 

97— With a Tungsten filament lamp, what amperage does a 6 c.p. lamp draw at 

6 volts?..*.467 

98— With a Tungsten filament lamp, what c.p. is a lamp which consumes 1 ampere 

at 6 volts?.467 

99— With a Tungsten filament lamp, what c.p. is a lamp which consumes 5 amperes 

at 6 volts?.467 

100—With a Tungsten filament lamp, what c.p. is a lamp which consumes Ty 2 

amperes at 6 volts?.. 467 

Read page 443 and note what the numbers on a battery indicate. 

























69 


Storage Battery Repairing. 

101— What tools are generally used for storage battery work?.463,474,473,472 

102 — What are the most common battery troubles ?....463 

103— Before disassembling a battery should the battery be tested to locate the 

defective cell ?.463 

104— Should other cells, if not defective, be washed and new separators added.?..463 

105— State procedure for disassembling a battery?. 463,469 

107— How would you proceed to take the elements apart?.469 

108— How would you proceed to remove a bad. plate?.469 

109— What examination should be given the positive plates?.....469 

110— What examination should be given the negative plates?.469 

llOa-What examination should be given the wood separators?..469 

111— What are separators made of, and how should wood separators be kept?. .469 

112— Is it advisable to wash out all sediment when a battery is apart?.469 

113— What should, be done with the old electrolyte?.. .469, 470 

114— If an old battery case is to be used again, which is acid-soaked, what should 

be done with it?.469,473 

115— State procedure for assembling a battery...470 

116— State procedure for assembling the elements.470 

117— State procedure for inserting separators. 470 

118— State procedure to seal a battery. 470 

119— What attention would you give the connectors?.470 

120— After repairing a battery, what is each cell filled, with?.470 

121— Suppose new plates are used, what should specific gravity of electrolyte be?.470 

122— Suppose old plates and new separators are used, what should s.g. of elec¬ 
trolyte be? And why higher?. 470 

123— If battery was repaired for a short-circuit, what s.g. of electrolyte is used?.470 

124— When putting in new separators and new electrolyte, if s.g. should drop, 

while charging, instead of rising, what is likely the cause?.470 

125— If storage battery is in a charged state and new solution or electrolyte is 

put into it, what is the result, and what s.g. solution should be used?.470 

126— How long after repairing a battery should the charge be started?.470 

127— At what rate should you charge a repaired battery, and for how long?.470 

128— Should temperature readings be taken?. 470 

129— When the charge is complete, what should be done?.471 

130— What is meant by “adjusting gravity”?.471 

131— Suppose adjustment is considerable, what is necessary to do?..471 

132— After adjustment, what should be done?.471 

133— If the temperature is far from normal, what should be done?.471 

134— Should top and sides of battery be wiped.? What with?.471 

135— What is meant by “lead burning”?. 471 

135a-What is the difference between a “burned connector” and a “bolted” con¬ 
nector? .468 

135b-What parts of a battery require “lead burning”?...445,470,471 

136— Can a gas outfit be used for “burning” lead connectors?.471,472 

137— What kind of gas is used, and which is best?.471,472 

1,38—Name the parts of a gas “burning outfit”.471,472 

139— Can electricity be used?. 471,472 

140— Name the parts necessary for an electric “arc”?.471,472 








































70 

141— Could a storage battery be used for a source of electric supply?.471, 472 

142— What is necessary to do before starting to burn?.471 

143 — Briefly outline how you would proceed, to burn a lead connection.471, 472 

144— How is corrosion of battery terminals prevented?..471 

145 — what solution is good for cleaning removable parts of battery?.471 

146 — Can a broken or cracked battery jar (hard rubber) be repaired.?.471 

147— How can celluloid battery jars be repaired?.473 

148— How would you proceed to remove a cell from a Willard battery?..473 

149— How would you remove a cell from the Exide battery?... • • • .473 

150— If the compound on top of battery cell cracks, how would you remedy same?.473 

151— How would, you make a battery box acid proof?.473 

152— Suppose electrolyte has been spilled from a cell, what would you do in 

replacing it?.. 473 

153— What is compound for sealing jars made of?.474 

154— In what sort of receptacle should electrolyte be kept?.474 

154a-What is meant by a “Cadmium test” of a storage battery? Ans. By means 

of a stick of cadmium inserted into the electrolyte, the positive and negative 
plates of each cell can be tested, in order to find out if one or more plates 
are defective. 

155— What are the plates in an Edison storage battery cell made of?.475 

156— What is the voltage of each cell?.475 

INSTRUCTION No. 33. 

The Electric Vehicle and Other Electrical Devices. 

1 — For what are electric vehicles used mostly?...477 

2— What is the disadvantage of an electric vehicle?...477 

3— What are the main parts of an electric vehicle?.477 

4— How many cells are generally used.?...477 

5— is the consumption of current greater when first starting from a standstill?.477 

6— what is the mileage of an electric vehicle dependent upon?.477 

7— What is the function of the controller?...477,478 

8— How is the speed of motor varied?...477,478 

9— Describe, briefly, the principle of the Woods Gas-Electric car.479 

10— Describe, briefly, the principle of the Electric brake.479 

11— Describe, brrefly, the principle of the Prest-O-Vacuum brake. ....479 

12— Explain, briefly, the principle of the Entze electric transmission.480 

13— Is there any mechanical connection between engine and drive shaft?.. .480, 481 

14— Is a clutch used?..480,481 

15— What takes the place of the clutch?. 480,481 

16— What takes the place of the transmission?.480,481 

17— How does the engine drive the rear axle?...480,481 

(Note.—Study the control lever positions, page 481. See also questions 42 to 51, 
under Instruction No. 6.) 

18— Explain, briefly, what the magnetic gear shift is for.482 

19— How are the gears of transmission shifted.?.482 

Read page 482 carefully. 

20— What was the “magnetic latch” on 1914 model Cadillac used for?. ....483 

21— Where was the magnetic latch placed?.483 




































71 

22 Briefly state operation of it when engine was started by starting motor....483 

23— Briefly state for what purpose the two drive pinions on drive shaft, and two 
driven gears on differential were for, on the Cadillac (1914) “two-speed” rear 
axle....483 

24— Was this in addition to the transmission?....483 

25— Briefly state how the speed change on rear axle was made, and what the 

magnetic latch was used for in connection with it.483 

26— How is the Gas-Electric truck driven, as shown on page 484?.....484 

27— Where is the gasoline engine placed, and what is it used for?.484 

28— Where are the electric motors placed, and what are they used for?.484 

29— Where is the electric generator placed, how driven, and for what purpose is it 


used?., .484 

30— How are the four wheels steered?.484 

31— What is the function of the “evener device”?.....484 


INSTRUCTION No. 34. 

Operating a Car. 

1 — What are the first things to become familiar with before attempting to operate 

a car?..485 

2— State a simple method for doing this.485 

3— What is the “gear shift lever” used for on a selective type transmission, and 

state the kinds in general use.485, 49 

4— What is the purpose of a clutch?..37,493 

5— What is the purpose of the transmission?.45 

6 — What is meant by “neutral” position of gear?.46 

(Note. —Review questions under Inst. 6. It is not necessary to answer same.) 


7—Name the different types of lever systems which have been used, and those 


that are now used.485 

8 — Name the usual foot pedals.485 

9— Is the clutch pedal always the left one, and the brake pedal the right one?.29, 39 

10— Where is the spark lever usually placed?.485 

11— Where is the throttle lever usually placed?..485 

12— What is the function of the accelerator?.492 

13— Is the throttle lever usually longer than the spark lever?.485 

14— Before starting an engine or car, what is the first precaution?...487,493 

15— Where would you place gear lever or gears, before starting engine?-487,493 


16— State, briefly, exact procedure in starting engine, just what you would do first, 

then next, and so on, until engine was running.487,493 

17— After engine had started what would you do?.487,494 

18— Before attempting to place car in motion, what would you do?.487 

19— How would you then start car?..486 

20— Should starting of car be done on low gear?.486,493,494 

21— State, briefly, how you would put gears in first, or low speed from “neutral”. .486 

22— State, briefly, how you would change from “low speed” to “second speed,” and 

then from “second” to “high or third” speed.486 

23— Is most of the running done on high gear?. 486 

24— What does “high gear” mean?.486 

25— How would you set spark for starting?...486, 67, 68 

26— How would you set spark after starting?.486, 67, 68 


































72 


27— Do you advance spark as engine is speeded up?.486, 67, 68 

28— How would you stop car?....489,495 

29— How would you reverse car? And. what is first necessary to do?.486,488 

30— Could engine run if car is not running?.489 

31— What would be necessary to do to prevent car from running?.489 

32— How would you slow your engine down when car was not running?.489 

33— How would you stop engine?.489 

34— Is it a good idea to draw gas into cylinders just before stopping?. .489 

35— How and why would, you do this?. 489 

36— What is necessary to do before “running in” or “breaking in” a new car?.489, 491 

37— What is liable to happen if a new engine is run too fast?.203 

38— Is it advisable to “race” engine, after having been left standing over night? 

(foot-note). 203 

39— What is meant by gear shift movements?.490 

40— What is the difference between the “gate” type and “ball and socket” type?.490 

41— What, is meant by the “S.A.E. standard” gear shift movement?.490 

42— Is this the movement which is used most?.490 

43— What does S.A.E. mean?. 534 

44— Make a sketch of the S.A.E. 3 speed gear shift movement. Which is used, 

most?. .490 

45— Make a sketch of the S.A.E. 4 speed gear shift movement.490 

(Read the following pages carefully, 491, 492, 493, 494, 495.) 

46— What is the best method of applying the brakes to stop a car, and why?. .494, 495 

47— Which brake on a car is used most, the foot or the hand brake?.691 

48— When should a change be made from high to low gear?.494 

49— What is meant by a car “skidding”?. 506,495 

50— Does the rear end usually skid first?.495 

51— What causes a car to “skid.”?..495,506 

52— What is the best method to overcome “skidding”?.551,588,495 

53— Are chains provided on the rear tires to prevent skidding?.551 

(Study pages 496, 497, 498, 499 and 500 carefully.) 

54— From foregoing information, and information on the pages mentioned here, 
briefly state just how you would start the engine on an Overland car.497, 358, 254 

55— What gear shift movement (on page 490) does Overland gear shift movement 

correspond with, and what type of gear shift lever is used?. 49 

INSTRUCTION No. 35. 

Rules of the Road. 

1— What side of the road should you drive on?...501, 502 

2— Should slow-moving vehicles remain closer to the curb or on the right side of 

the road?....501,502 

3— Should fast-going vehicles take more of the center of the road?.501,502 

4— In passing a vehicle, should you pass on its left?.501, 502, 504 

5— In stopping or slowing down, should you be on the extreme right side of the 

road? .501, 502 

6 — When turning a corner, what side should you turn on?.502 

(Read and study illustrations on pages 502-504, carefully.) 

7— When two vehicles approach a street intersection simultaneously, as per lower 

illustration, page 502, which one has the right of way?.502 


































73 


8 What is the minimum distance from a fire plug allowed by law, when parking 

your car on a street?.503 

9—Is it against the law (in most states) to have glaring headlights?.504,433 

INSTRUCTION No. 36. 

Care for a Car. 

1— If a tire “blows out,” should the brakes be applied suddenly?.506 

2— What happens to tires that are not sufficiently inflated?.506 

3— When applying new tires, is it a good, plan to put them on the rear wheels and 

remove those on the rear to the front wheels, if tires are all the same size?. .506 

4— In case of a gasoline fire, what is the best method to put it out?.506,507 

5— After an engine has run a great number of miles, what is likely to happen? 
.506,507 

6— Should all nuts and bolts be gone over and tightened periodically?.507 

7— State procedure of washing a car?.507 

8— Is it injurious to the varnish to rub mud off a car?.507 

9— When washing car, what should be used?.507 

10— After washing car, what should, be used to dry it with?.507 

11— Should the chamois be washed out and all of the water squeezed or wrung out 

of it when wiping off the car?.507 

12.—How would you clean mud from a radiator?.507 

13— Should a car be washed immediately after it is rained, upon?.507 

14— Is body polish a good thing to use to polish car after it is washed and dried?. .507 

15— Should the surface be rubbed dry after using body polish, in order that it does 

not collect dust?.508 

16— Is it injurious to the varnish of a car to wipe the dust off? Yes. It will 
cause the dust to scratch the varnish. Dust off first with a soft wool duster. 
(Read pages 507, 508, 509, and 510 carefully.) 

INSTRUCTION No. 37. 

Accessories. 

1— What is the purpose of a speedometer?.511 

2— What is the purpose of an odometer?. 511 

3— How are speedometers and odometers usually driven?.513 

4— What is the “trip register” for on an odometer?.511,512 

5— What are the indications of trouble of a speedometer?.512,742 

6— What is a bumper for?.511,514 

7— Name the necessary accessories...511 

8— Name the desirable accessories.515 

8a-Name the types of electric horns.515,514 

9— What is the principle of the “electric vibrating” horn?.515,514 

10— What is the principle of the “electric motor” horn?.515,514 

11— State, briefly, how you would adjust the Klaxon horn?...514 

12— What is the difference between the “compression whistle” and the “exhaust 

whistle”?.515, 514 

(Read pages 515, 517, 518, 519, 520, if you ever start on a tour.) 






























INSTRUCTION No. 38. 

Insurance, License and Laws. 

1— What is the difference between fire and theft, liability, property damage and 

collision insurance?..521 

2 — Name the two kinds of licenses issued by states and cities.522 

3— What is the usual age limit?.522 

4— How would you proceed to obtain a chauffeur’s license?. . .522 

(Read pages 524, 525, 526, 527.) 

5— State, briefly, the things to be considered before purchasing a second-hand 

car?.528 

6 — State, briefly, some of the important points to consider before purchasing a 

commercial car.528 

INSTRUCTION No. 39. 

The Automobile Salesman. 

1—What is necessary to become a successful automobile salesman?.529 

Read carefully, “Salesmanship Pointers,” pages 529, 530, 531, 533. 

Read carefully and ask yourself the following questions (you are not required to 
write the answers): 

1— What are the advantages of the long stroke engine?.531 

2— What are the advantages of the short stroke engine?.531 

3— What are the advantages of a five-bearing crankshaft?.531, 532 , 

4— What are the advantages of a three-bearing crankshaft?.532 

4a—What are the disadvantages of a five-bearing crankshaft?.532 

5— What are the advantages of the “offset” cylinders?.532 

6 — What are the advantages of the eight-cylinder engine?.532 

7— What are the advantages of the six-cylinder engine?..'532 

8 — What are the advantages of the four-cylinder engine?.532 

9— What are the disadvantages of the eight-cylinder engine?.532 

10— What are the advantages of the T-head engine?.532 

11— What are the disadvantages of the T-head engine?.532 , 

12— What are the advantages of the over-head valve engine?.532 

13— What are the advantages of dual valves?.927 

14— What are the advantages of a balanced crankshaft?.532 

14a-What are the advantages of a full-floating axle?.532 

15— What are the advantages of a three-point suspension?.533 

INSTRUCTION No. 40. 

Horsepower, Table and General Data. 

1— Explain the meaning of horsepower.535 

2— Explain the meaning of “brake” horsepower.535 | 

2a-Explain the meaning of “actual” horsepower.535 

3— Explain the meaning of “indicated” horsepower.535 

4— Explain the meaning of “total power” of an engine.535 

5— What do the initials H.P. (as here used) stand for?.535 

6 — What do the initials B.H.P. (as here used) stand for?.535 

7— What do the initials I.H.P. (as here used) stand for?.535 

8 — What is the h.p. of an engine dependent upon?.534 

9— What is meant by piston speed of an engine?.534 

10— What piston speed was the S.A.E. horsepower formula worked, out from?_534 

11 — What does the factor of piston speed take in?. 534 

12— Suppose the stroke of an engine was 4 inches, how many strokes would the 

piston make to travel 12 inches or one foot?. 534 

13— How many strokes would piston make, to travel 1 foot, if engine was a 6 -inch 

stroke?. 534 








































75 

How many feet would a piston travel in an engine with a 3-inch stroke when 
crank shaft was turning 200 revolutions per minute?.540 

15 State how the S.A.E, formula estimates the h.p. of an engine.534 

16 Figure out the h.p. (S.A.E. formula) of a four-cylinder engine with a 4 -inch 

stroke. ,...534 

17— What does D 2 mean?.. 534 

18— What does N mean?. 534 

19— Is the stroke of engine considered, at all in the S.A.E. formula?.534 

20— What is meant by the “constant”?. 534 

21 Hoes a gasoline engine depend upon speed for its power? Why?.536 

22 Why are transmission gears necessary in use with a gasoline engine for auto¬ 
mobile work?.. 

23— Is the maximum h.p. greater than the nominal h.p.?.536 

24— What is a fan dynamometer for?.536 

25— What is an electrical dynamometer for?.536 

26— Is the amount of work the dynamo will do, such as lighting lamps, etc., depend¬ 

ent upon the power put into it by the engine, and. is the h.p! calculated in 
this way?.. 

27— What is meant by a “prony” brake h.p. test”?. 537 

28— What is a taximeter for?. 537 

29— What is the meaning of “piston displacement”?.538 

30— What is the “piston displacement” of a four-cylinder engine, 4 -inch bore, and 

5* 4 -inch stroke?.. 

31— How are “grades” expressed?. 539 

32— Make a sketch showing the “incline” or “angle” of a line to represent a 100 

per cent grade. 539 

33— What “angle” would a “100 per cent grade” represent, from the horizontal line 

A to B?. 539 

(Study the other subjects on page 539.) 

34— What is meant by a “degree,” and what is the designation or symbol of a 

degree?.541, 93 

35— What is a “protractor”?.... 541 

36— Express in figures, “one-thousandth of an inch”.541 

37— WTiat would the following figures mean: .015?.541 

38— What would the following figures mean: .030?.541 

39— What part of an inch would .125 be, expressed in a common fraction?.541 

40— What is meant by “metric system”?.541 

41— What is the sign or symbol of “inches”?.541 

42— What is the sign or symbol of “seconds”?.541 

43— What is the sign or symbol of “feet”?.541 

44— What is the sign or symbol of “minutes”?.541 

45— What is the sign or symbol of. “millimeters”?.541 

46— What is a “millimeter”?. 541 

47— What part of an inch are 20 mm.?.541 

48— How many cylinders has the Ford engine?. 544 

49— What is the “bore” and “stroke” of a Ford engine?.544 

50— What is the horsepower of a Ford engine?.544 

51 — What is the “piston displacement” in cubic inches?.544 

52— What is the “high gear ratio”?. 544 









































76 


53— What is the make of engine?.544 

54— What “type of cylinder” is used?.544 


(These questions are asked in order to familiarize the student with the method of 
determining the specifications of leading cars. The balance of the specifications can 
be followed out by the student.) 

(See pages 547, 548, where to obtain parts for Orphan Cars, or cars no longer manu¬ 
factured. Some day, when you are repairing cars of old makes, this may be of 
value to you.) 


INSTRUCTION No. 41. 

Tires. 

1— Why are rubber tires used on automobiles?.549 

2— Name two types of tires.549 

3— Why are “solid tires” not suitable for high speed cars?.549 

4— What kind of a tire is a “pneumatic tire”?.549 

5— Name the two forms of pneumatic tires.549 

6— Of how many parts does the modern pneumatic tire consist?.549 

7— How is the tire held to wheel?..549 

8— What is meant by a “single tube” pneumatic tire?.549 

9— What is meant by “double tube” pneumatic tire?.549 

10— What are “bolts” or “lugs” used for?.549 

11— What part of a pneumatic tire is the “shoe” or “outer casing”?.549 

12— What type of inner tube is used on “double tube” pneumatic tires?.549 

13— What part of the inner tube is the “valve stem”?.549 

14— What is the “valve stem” for?.549 

15— What part is the “valve-stem-seat”?.549 

16— What part is the “inner valve”?.549 

17— What is the “inner valve” for?.549 

17a-Describe a Schrader valve...550 

18— State, briefly, how you would proceed to inflate a tube in a pneumatic tire... .549 

19— State, briefly, how you would deflate tube.551 

20— State some of the causes of “slow air leaks”?.551 

21— How would you test for “inner-valve leaks”?.....551 

22— How would you test for a “valve stem,” or “slow leak,” or “puncture”?.551 

23— What is the average life of a tube?..551 

24— What part of an outer casing (shoe) is the tread?.549, 551 

25— What part of an outer casing (shoe) is the bead?.549,553 

26— State the two kinds of “treads” on outer casings.551 

27— What is the purpose of a “non-skid” tread tire?.551 

28— What other method is used to prevent “skidding”?.551 

29— Is the chain considered the best prevention for skidding?.551 

29a-How are weed chains applied?.550 

30— What are “rims” for, and to what part of the wheel are they fitted?.549,551 

31— Name the two classes in general use?.551 

32— Name the different “clincher” type rims?.551 

33— What is the difference between the “plain clincher” rim and the “quick 

detachable clincher” rim?. 551 

34— What is the difference between the “quick detachable clincher” rim and the 

“quick detachable, demountable clincher” rim.551 

35— Could the “straight side rim” be “quick detachable”?.552 

35a-Could the straight side rim be a “quick detachable, demountable rim”?.553 








































77 

35b-What is meant by a “reversible rim”? (foot-note).553,552,551 

36 When removing a tire with a “plain clincher bead,” from a “plain clincher 

rim,” is the rim removed?.558,551 

37—Is it necessary to remove tire to take out a defective tube and put in another? 


..558,551 

38—When removing a “clincher bead” or “straight side bead.” tire from a “quick 


detachable rim,” is the entire rim removed? If not, what part?.551 

39— Is it necessary to remove tire from rim to repair tube?.551 

40— When removing a “quick detachable, demountable” tire from a wheel, is the 

rim removed with tire?. 551 

41— Is another tire mounted on rim already inflated, then put in place of the tire 

and rim removed.?. 551 

42— How does a “side ring” type rim differ from a “split rim” of the Q.D. demount¬ 
able type?.556,557 

43— State, briefly, how you would proceed to remove a tire from the rim of a “side 

ring” type. 556 

44— State, briefly, how you would proceed to replace a tire on the rim of a “side 

ring type. 556 

45— State, briefly, how you would, proceed to remove a tire from the rim of a “split 

ring” type. 557 

46— State, briefly, how you would proceed to replace a tire on the rim of a “split 

ring” type. .557 

47— How does the “cord” tire differ from the regular “fabric” type tire?.559 

48— State four ways of keeping down tire expense..553 

49— What causes more than three-fourths of all tire troubles?.553 

50— What governs the “inflation pressure” of a tire?.553 

51— Does an “under inflated” tire ride easier than a “fully inflated” tire?.553 

52— Is “under inflation” injurious to a tire?.553 

53— Name the different methods for “inflating” tires.553,562 

54— How are “power air compressors” driven?.553,562 

55— Explain the principle of the “impulse tire pump”.562 

56— Explain the principle of the “power driven air compressor”.562 

57— Describe, briefly, a “compound air pump”.562 

57a-For what different purposes can air compressors be used in garages?... .563, 564 


(Note how to determine size pulleys and speed to drive air compressors, page 563.) 


(Note size tanks to use for inflating certain number of tires, page 564.) 

58— On what 2 types of vehicles are solid tires generally used?.560 

59— Why are solid tires not suitable for pleasure cars?.549 

60— What kind of a solid tire is a “cushion” tire?. 560 

61— What kind of a solid tire is a “dual” tire?.560 

(Note the different methods for attaching “grip” chains to solid tires on page 560.) 

62— What kind of tires are there used on heavy trucks and some tractors?.561 

63 — What kind of wheels are there used on tractors?.829,826 

64— What tools are necessary to remove clincher tires?.558 

65 — what tools are necessary to remove Q.D. and Q.D. demountable tires?. .556, 557 

































78 


INSTRUCTION No. 42. 

Tire Repairing. 

1— How is a “pneumatic tire” made?.565 

2— What part of tire holds the strain and pressure?.565,566 

3— Is the rubber merely a cushion and. a protection for the canvas?..'_565 

4— What is the best material for the “carcass” of a “fabric” tire?.566 


(Note the “cord” tire is considered the best carcass and others are called “fabric” 
carcasses.) 


5— Is it injurious to a tire to run it flat, even for a short distance?.565 

6— Is oil and grease injurious to a tire?...565 

7— What is meant by “alignment of wheels”?.565,683 

8— What is the result, if wheels are “out of alignment”?.683 

9— What is meant by “camber” of front wheels?.683 

10— What is meant by “toe-in” of front wheels?.683 

11— When a tire has a worn place around the center of the tread, what is usually 

the cause?.. 

12— Why does a right rear tire wear faster than the others?.683 

(Note.—See page 683 and 682 and study carefully.) 


13— Name some of the troubles a tire is heir to.566 

14— How can small cuts on the tread be repaired?.566 

15— How can a “sand blister” be remedied?.566 

16— What is meant by “retreading” a tire?.566 

17— What is meant by a “rim cut”?.566 

18— What is meant by a “blow out”?.566 

19— Name the two classes of “blow-outs”.567 

20— What is the usual cause for a “rim blow-out”?.567 

21— What is the usual cause for a “tread, blow-out”?.567 

22— How would you prevent a “rim blow-out”?.567 

23— How would you prevent a “tread blow-out”?.567 

23a-What is a “loose tread”? “worn tread”?.566 

24— How would you protect “weak places” in tires?.567 

25— What is meant by a tube “pinching”?. 567 


26— How would you test an inner tube for a leak?.567,568 

27— How would you test an “inner valve” for a slow leak?..!.551,568 

28— How would you test a “valve-stem” for a leak?.*.551,568 

29— How would you remove an “inner valve”?. 568 551 


30— Is it possible for a slow leak to come from an “inner-valve” being screwed 

down too tight? (foot-note).. 

31— If you get a puncture, is it important to see if nail or tack, or whatever caused 

the puncture, is not left in the tire case to puncture tube again?.567,558 

32 Is it best to always put in spare tube and not try and repair tube on the road, 

but vulcanize it later?. 5 69 

33 Is the modern method, to carry an extra tire inflated complete on a demount¬ 
able rim ready to apply? Yes. 

34—In this instance, would it be necessary that wheel be fitted for a demountable 
rim? Yes. 


(Note page 569 how to cement a patch on an inner tube, also other pointers stated on 

p3-g6 5d»7,) 


35—What is the average “life of an inner tube,” 
become as it grows old?. 


and in what condition does it 
.569 





































79 

36— What is meant by “lubrication of a tube”?.569 

37— Is there a liability of soapstone forming in lumps and injuring the tube, if too 

much is used and not evenly spread inside of tire case?.569 

38— What are “valve spreaders” used for?. 571 

39— When inserting an inner tube in a tire, is it best to slightly inflate it?.558 

40 State, briefly, how you would proceed to remove an inner tube.558 

41— State, briefly, how you would proceed to replace an inner tube.558 

42— What is meant by “vulcanizing”?.. 

43— In repairing an inner tube puncture with an electric vulcanizer, what is first 

necessary to do?.. 

44— If hole is small, what is the procedure?.572 

45— Are edges then beveled?... 572 

46— How long should repairs of this kind be vulcanized?....572 

47— If inner tube is cut or torn, what is the first thing to do?.572 

48— What is the next thing to do?.572 

49— How long is this vulcanized?.572 

50— When mending large bursts or blow-outs of inner tubes, what is the procedure? 572 

51— State, briefly, how you would proceed to “splice” an inner tube...572 

52— State, briefly, how you would proceed to repair a “valve-stem-seat”?.572 

53— What governs the time required for vulcanizing an inner tube?.573 

54— What steam pressure is generally used for steam vulcanizing?. 573 

55— How would you test a vulcanized tube after repairing?.573 

56— How would you proceed to repair a “blow-out” in a tire case? State what 

would be the first thing to do. 575 

57— How many coats of cement would you apply after scraping and cleaning?_ 575 

58— How large would you cut the “first layer of fabric” for repair, and what kind 

of fabric would you use?. ..575 

59— How large would you cut the “second layer of fabric,” and would it be coated 

on bpth sides with para?. 575 

60— Would you use a third and “fourth layer of fabric,” and what kind, and where 

would you place it?.. 575 

61— What would you do next with the tire?.... 575 

62— W T here would you then sprinkle soapstone?.575 

62a-Is waxed paper then placed over the repair? What would you do next?....575 


63— State, briefly, how you would then proceed to vulcanize, and for how long..575 

64— Suppose the “blow-out” was close to the rim, how would the repair differ?..575 


INSTRUCTION No. 43. 

Digest of Troubles. 

1 — What does “diagnosing” automobile troubles require?.576 

2— Should you first “think” and try to reason out the cause of a trouble before 

starting to try and remedy same?.576 

(In other words, you should first “think.” then “act,” and not act before thinking. 
Remember this, it will save a lot of time.) 

3 — what are the two essentials necessary before an engine will run?.576 

4 — to w hat are most troubles due?.576 

(Note.—Read page 576 carefully before proceeding further.) 

5 — What is meant by “process of elimination”?.577 


6_Do you clearly understand the meaning of the six lines at top of page 577? 


































80 


7— Have you carefully read page 577? 

8— Name three kinds of ordinary engine troubles.578 

(Note.—Ask yourself the following- questions and answer same from memory after 
reading page 578 and 579. You are not required to send the answers in unless you 
so desire. This is a matter of reference.) 

9— Briefly state cause if engine “fails to start”. 578 

10— Briefly state cause if engine “starts, but misses”.578 

11— Briefly state cause if engine starts, but “pops in carburetor”.578 

12— Briefly state cause if engine starts, but “will not pull”.578 

13— Briefly state cause if engine “runs regularly for a few minutes and then stops.578 

14— Briefly state cause if “engine stops suddenly”.578 

15— Briefly state cause if “engine stops slowly with missing”.578 

16— Briefly state cause if “engine loads up”.578 

17— Briefly state cause if “engine lacks flexibility”.578 

18— Briefly state cause if “engine misses explosion”.579 

19— Briefly state cause if “engine misses on high speed”.579 

20— Briefly state cause if “engine misses on low speed”.579 

21— Briefly state cause if “engine misses at all speeds”.579 

22— Briefly state cause if “engine does not deliver full power”.579 

23— Briefly state cause if “engine overheats”.579 

24— When an engine overheats by steaming, if the radiator is cold at the bottom 

and hot at the top, what is likely the trouble? (foot-note).579 

25— If radiator is warm at the bottom, is it likely to be frozen?.579 

26— Briefly state cause “if engine knocks”.580 

27— Briefly state cause “if engine will not stop when switched off”.580 

28— Briefly state cause if “engine runs well, but car drags”.580 

29— Briefly state cause if “the clutch drags”.580 

30— Briefly state cause if “the clutch grabs or is fierce”.580 

31— Briefly state cause if “the clutch leather (cone type) is oily”. 580 

32— Briefly state cause if “engine back-fires in muffler”.580 

33— Briefly state cause if “crank case becomes very hot and engine weak”.580 

34— Briefly state cause if “exhaust pipe and muffler overheats”.580 

35— Briefly state cause if “engine makes a hissing noise”.;.580 

36— Briefly state cause if “gasoline fails to reach carburetor”.580 

37— Briefly state cause if “smoke continually comes from muffler”.580 

38— Briefly state the effect if there is a “crack in cylinder”.......580 

39— Briefly state cause if “carburetor drips”.580 

40— Briefly state cause of “abnormal noise from transmission gears”.580 

41— Briefly state cause if “lubrication stops”.581 

42— Briefly state cause if “oil gauge does not show flow of oil”.581 

43— Briefly state cause of “oil leakage from engine”.581 

(Note the freezing point, boiling point and specific gravity of water, kerosene, alcohol 
and gasoline, page 585.) 

(Read pages 581 to 590 carefully.) , 

INSTRUCTION No. 44. 

The Automobile Repairman. 

1— What class of work is the automobile repairman called upon to do most?_593 

2— Is the trade of a machinist and that of an automobile repairman two distinct 

trades?.*.593 







































81 


3— What is meant by “order and system,” in doing work around an automobile?.593 

4— What kind of an automobile repairman would we class the “auto mechanician”? 

. . ..594 

5— What are some of the jobs most anyone can do after completing this course?.594 

6— What is meant by giving a car a “general overhaul”? Does it include all 

parts?.594,595 

(Read carefully, on pages 594 and 595, what is necessary to do to clean engine, lubri¬ 
cate engine, clean car, lubricate car, inspection and adjustment, inspection of engine 
and parts, engine adjusting.) 

7— Is there a good profit in selling supplies?.595 

(Read page 595 carefully.) 

8— How would you start as an “automobile mechanician,” and what is the best 

plan to begin the trade?.594,597 

9— Is it advisable to secure catalogues, instruction books, etc., of the different 
manufacturers of cars, carburetors, electric systems, etc? Yes. 

10—How would you find the address? See index, under “addresses.” 


INSTRUCTION No. 45. 

Equipping Garage and Shop. 

1— What is the difference between a “repair shop” and a “garage”?.597 

2— Then it would be a question of first deciding if you wished to do repair work 

or operate a garage and do repair work also.597 

3— State the different departments you could add to a garage.597,601, 610 

4— State the different departments you could add to a repair shop.597,601,610 

(Read pages 596, 597, 598, carefully.) 

5— What method is used most for heating a garage?.59S, 599 

6— Name some of the “fixtures” required for a garage.599, 601 

7— How should the “gasoline supply” be stored?.599, 602 

8— What is a curb or roadside gasoline pump for?.602 

9— Is it important that a stock room be provided?.601 

10 — Name some of the supplies in the rubber line which are always needed.601 

11— Is it profitable to handle lubricating oils and greases and sell to your cus¬ 
tomers? .601 

12— Name other departments which can be added which are profitable.601 

13— Do batteries require charging more often in the winter? Why?.601 

14 — what is an “inspection pit” for?.601,604 

15— What is a “chain hoist” for?.601, 604 

(Read pages 607, 608, 609, carefully, and note supplies which are always needed 
around a garage.) 

15 —What is meant by an “oversize piston,” and when is it required?.609,653 

16£u-What are the standard for oversize pistons?.653,654 

17 _What is meant by an “oversize piston ring,” and when is it required?.609 

18 _What is meant by an “oversize valve-stem,” and when is it required?. .609, 630 

19 — Name the different kinds of “open end wrenches”.611 

20— Where are open end wrenches used?.611 

2 1— what two classes are open end wrenches divided under?.611 

22 — What is the difference between the “U.S.S.” and “S.A.E.” wrenches?.611 


(Note_Study this page 611 carefully and note how to find the size wrench to fit a 

standard cap screw or bolt and nut. It will first be necessary that you learn the 
difference between a “cap screw” and a “bolt,” which is explained on page 701.) 




























82 


(Read page 612 carefully and note the difference between the “S. A. E. cap screw 
and bolt sizes” and the “U. S. S. bolt sizes”; head and nut. Note the difference in 


the number of “threads” to the inch. Threads are explained on page 702. 

23— What is a “spark plug shell”?.612 

24— Give the number of “threads to the inch,” and “size of threads” used on S.A.E. 

spark plugs..612 

25— What is the diameter of the “small hexagon” of the S.A.E. spark plug shell?.612 

26— What is the diameter of the “large hexagon” of the S.A.E. spark plug shell?.612 

27— What are “screw dies” and “taps” used for?.612,704 

28— What are “socket wrenches” used for, and how do they differ from an open 

end wrench?.613 

(Read pages 614. 615, 616, 617 carefully.) 

29— What are “cylinder reamers” for?.616,653 

30— What are “reboring machines” for?. 616,653 


31— What is the difference between “reaming a cylinder” and “reboring a cylinder”? 
.616, 653 

(See questions 240a to 251, under Inst. 46.) 

32— Name some of the machine shop equipment desirable for a small shop?.618 

.33—What proportions of sand, gravel and cement are used, when mixing concrete, 


suitable for foundation and floor of garage?.619 

INSTRUCTION No. 46. 

Repairing and Adjusting. 

1— What does an “overhaul of a car” consist of?.620 

2— How would you proceed to “clean a radiator”?.620 

3— What attention should be given to carburetor?.620 

4— What attention should be given to clutch?.620 

5— What attention should be given to universal joint?.620 

6— What attention should be given to transmission?.620 

7— What attention should be given to wheels?.621 

8— What attention should be given to rear axle?.621 

9— Briefly state how you would proceed to “clean an engine”. 621 

10— What would you do after cleaning engine?. 621 

11— Briefly state what attention you would give to the “exhaust system”.622 

12— Briefly state how you would “grease a car”?.622 

13— Briefly state how you would “lubricate the springs”.,622 

14— What is meant by “oil film,” and how does the proper film protect the 

engine?.623 

15— What kind, of oil should be used?.603 

Carbon. 

16— What is meant by “carbon deposit”?.202,623 

16a-What causes carbon deposit?. 623,202 

17— Will either too much gasoline fed to cylinders by carburetor, or too much 

oil and poor grade of oil, cause carbon deposit?.623 

(See page 202, “smoky exhaust—cause of,” and read carefully.) 

18— What are some of the causes of carbon deposit from the use of lubricating 

oil?.623 






























83 


19—When a charge of gasoline and. air is taken into the cylinder, what does it 


consist of?..623 

20 — Is it the “oxygen” in the air combined with the “carbon and hydrogen of the 

gasoline,” that produces an explosive mixture?.623 

21— If the amount of air entering the carburetor is not sufficient to insure com¬ 
plete combustion, what is the result?.623 

22— How does this principle compare with that of a lamp wick?.623 

23— Where does carbon lodge or collect?.623 

24— Briefly state the bad effects of carbon deposit?.625 

25— Briefly state the “indications of carbon deposit”....625 

26— Name the different methods of “removing carbon” from cylinders.625 

27— Where should piston be placed when using oxygen for carbon removal?.625, 626 

Compression. 

28— State the main causes why an engine fails to develop its usual power?.626 

29— What is meant by “compression”?.862 

30— What is the ratio between the “compression pressure” and the “explosive 

pressure”? (foot-note).626 

31— Where is the “compression space” on an engine?.627 

32— Where could “compression leaks” occur on an engine?.627, 628 

33— What is the most frequent cause of “loss of compression”?.628 

34— Could a “loss of compression” be caused by leaky piston rings?.628 

35— How would you test an engine for compression?.629 

36— How does a cylinder of an engine with good compression crank?.629 

37— How are leaks through one or more valves indicated?.629 

38— How would you test for a leak at the valve cap, spark plug or relief cock? 

. 629,233 

39— How would you test for a leak between the piston and cylinder walls?.629 

40— How would you test for a leak at the inlet valve?.629 

41— When spark plugs are constantly oily, and foul often, what does this indicate? 
......630,652 

42— How do spark plugs indicate the valve condition?.630 

43— How would you test a “valve seat” to see if valve seats tight?.630 

44— To obtain a slow, even pull and steady running at idling speed, is it impor¬ 
tant that there be no compression leaks?.171 

45 — What is the advantage of “high compression”?.627 

46 — What is the disadvantage of “high compression”?.627 

47 — Why is an engine more subject to overheating if compression is higher?.. .627 

48 — i s it d.esirable to have large valve openings and long periods of exhaust open¬ 
ings, if high compression is used?.627 

49 — Where are spark plugs usually placed when valves are “overhead”?.627 

50 — is it desirable to eliminate “valve pockets” when using a high compression, 

and is the “L»” type cylinder more subject to valve pockets?.627 

51— Is the “maximum compression” determined when throttle is wide open?.627 

52— If a smaller charge is taken into the cylinder, then the compression would be 

less, would it not?..626 

53 — state the variety of causes “faulty compression” could come from?.626 

54 — what is meant by a “compression knock”?.640 

54 a-What is a “spark knock”?..639 

54b-How does a knock caused by “high compression” sound?.640 






































84 

55— How is it possible to sometimes reduce compression on an engine if it over¬ 
heats and you are sure it is caused by too great a compression?.640 

56— On engines using kerosene as fuel, what is the average compression in 

pounds? (foot-note). 627 

57— What is the compression on the Hudson?.627 

57a-State other causes of loss of power.626 

58— Will the power of an engine be less if the compression pressure is low?-628 

59— Will the power of an engine be greater if the compression pressure is greater? 
.628 

60— Is the most frequent cause of “loss of compression” due to leaky or pitted 

valves and piston rings?.628 


Valve Adjustments. 

61—How would, you determine if the valves needed regrinding or reseating?-630 


62—What is meant by “grinding a valve”?.630, 631, 632 

62a-What is meant by “reseating a valve”?.630,631,632 


63— How would you test to see if a valve needed grinding?.630 

64— What would be the “first” thing to do when starting to grind valves?.630 

65— What would be the “second” thing to do when starting to grind valves?.631 

66— What would be the “third” and “fourth” things to do?...631 

67— After grinding, what would you then do?.631 

68— What pressure is best for grinding valves?.631 

69— Should “valve clearance” be adjusted after grinding valves?.631 

70— How does grinding a “cage” type valve differ from grinding a valve in a “T” 

or “L” head type cylinder?...631,632 

71— How would you grind the valves in a “detachable cylinder head”?.636 

72— How would you tell if valve which has been ground has a perfect seat?.631, 632 

73— What is meant by “refacing a valve”?.632 

74— What is meant by “reseating a valve-seat”?.632 


75—Are many valves now made of hard Tungsten steel, and would it be possible 


to grind a valve of this type?.632 

76— How is a Tungsten valve refaced or ground to its seat?.632 

77— What is meant by “reaming valve guides”?.632,630, 609 

78— When valve stems or the valve guide becomes worn, what is then necessary 

to do?.630 

79— How do “oversize valve stems” usually vary in size?.630 

80— Are “valve guides” sometimes “bushed,” and can they be renewed?.634 

81— What is the average “clearance” on a Dodge between “valve guide” and 

“valve stem”?.634 


82—When valves are noisy, isi it usually due to the valve clearance being too 


great?.634 

83— How is this overcome?.634 

84— Will improper valve clearance cause lack of power? How?.635, 94, 95 

85— How would you determine which valve was noisy?.635 

86— If no space at all is left between the valve stem and plunger (or tappet), 

* What would be the result?...635,634 

87— Is the exhaust valve given more clearance than the inlet valve on some 

engines, due to its heating more? (foot-note).634 

88— What are valve springs for?.92,635 

89— If the springs lost their tension, what is the result?.635 






































85 


90—What would be the reason for missing explosion from a weak exhaust spring?.635 


91— What is the result if inlet valve springs are too weak?.635 

92— Will this also cause noise at the cams? How?.635 

93— How would you test for a weak exhaust spring?.635 

94— How would you increase the tension of a valve spring?.635 


Knocks. 


95—Name the different parts of an engine which would likely cause a knock if 


loose or worn.635,790 

96— How would you proceed to locate the knock?.635,638 

97— Would you first assure yourself that the knock was not due to minor causes?.635 

98— State what these minor causes would, be.635 

99— What is meant by “piston slap”?.'.637 

100— Are “aluminum alloy” pistons more subject to “piston slap” than “cast iron” 

pistons? Why?.637,638 

101— What troubles will cause a knock on a hill but not on the level ground?.637, 790 

102— How can the “lean mixture” trouble be remedied?.637 

103— Will climbing a hill with spark too far advanced cause knocking?.637 

104— Will cylinder nuts, if loose, cause a knock?.637 

104a-Will fly-wheel, if loose, cause a knock?.639 

104b-How would you test for a loose fly-wheel?.638 

105— If connecting rods should be bent out of true would this cause a piston to 

slap?...,... 637 

106— What is meant by “pre-ignition,” and how would, this cause a knock?.639 

107— How would you proceed to locate the cause of a knock?.639 


108—If a slight metallic rap is heard at 10 or 15 m.p.h. on level road, what is likely 


the cause?. 639 

109— If a slight knock is heard which slightly increases as the car mounts the 

hill, what is the cause?. 639 

110— How would a knock caused by carbon deposit be indicated?.639,790 

111 — How would, a knock caused by loose connecting rod on the crank shaft or 

piston pin be indicated?.630,790 

llla-State one method for testing for a loose connecting rod lower bearing-638 

112— How would a knock caused by worn crank shaft main bearing be indicated?.639 

113— How would you detect a “spark knock”?.639 

113a-How would a broken piston ring be indicated?.793 

114 — What is meant by a “seized piston,” and what causes it to seize? (foot-note) .639 

115— How would you proceed to remedy a trouble of this kind?.639,202 


Engine Bearings and Connecting Rods. 

116 —Are the main bearings of an engine a very important part?.640 

117 _Name the kind of bearing usually used on main bearings of crank shaft-640 

118— what kind is used on upper end of connecting rod?.73,644 

119 — What is the difference between a “bearing” and a “bearing bushing”?.73 

120— Are there two “bushings” in a main bearing on the crank shaft?.641 

121— What is a “shim”?. 641 

122— Where are the shims placed?. 641 

423 _Does the rear main bearing next the fly-wheel usually require attention first? 

Why?. 641 

124—How would you proceed to take up a main bearing on a crank shaft?-641 


































86 


125— How would you test after taking up?.641 

126— Is most of the wear on the lower bearing cap?.643 

127— If bushing is burned or cut, can it be scraped?.643 

128— How would you proceed, to “scrape a bearing”?.642,643 

129— What is meant by “marking” or “spotting in” a bearing?. 642 

130— How often is this “spotting in” process repeated?.642 

131— After “scraping,” what is the next procedure?.642 

132— What is meant by “crank shaft alignment”?.643 

133— What is meant by a “scored” crank shaft?.642 

134— How would you remedy same?.642 

135— How would you “take up” on the lower end of a connecting rod bearing?.641, 642 

136— How would you “scrape” a lower connecting rod bushing?.642,643 

137— Would, you first sfart with the rear connecting rod cap bushing?.643 

138— State exact procedure of “spotting in” a connecting rod lower end bushing. .643 

139— How would you test the adjustment of a connecting rod. lower end on the 

crank shaft?.643 


140— How would you proceed to test for “parallelism” of the connecting rods? 
.642, 646, 649, 659 

141— Name the three “disalignments” possible in piston and. connecting rod (foot¬ 


note) .649 

142—If the “small end” of connecting rod is worn what is necessary to do?....642 


(Read “bearing pointers,” page 643, carefully.) 


143— Are “oil grooves” in bearing bushings very important, and how should they 

be arranged?.644,203 

144— What is a “piston pin” for, and what is it made of?.645 

145— What is the difference between the “stationary piston pin” and the “oscillat¬ 
ing piston pin”?. 645 

146— How would you remove piston pin if stationary?.645 

147— How would you remove bronze bushing in “upper end” of connecting rod?. .645 

148— What “clearance” is allowed for connecting rod bearing at “upper end” on 

the Oldsmobile? (foot-note).645 

149— How would you test to find out if lower connecting rod bearing was loose? 
.645,837,638 

150— How would you “take up” or adjust same?.645, 837 

151— Is “side play” necessary? About how much?.645 

152— What is meant by “side play”?.645 

153— Give a brief outline of what you would do “first” in adjusting the main bear¬ 

ings and connecting rod bearings of an engine, using the Waukesha as an 
example?.837 

154— What is the “second” procedure?. 837 

155— What is the “third” procedure?.837 

156— What is the “fourth” procedure?.837 

157— Before replacing the “connecting rod cap” what w’ould you do?.837 

158— How would you determine if you had bearings too tight or not?.837 

159— How would you proceed to “replace worn or damaged main bearings”? State 

the first, second, third and fourth procedure?.838 

160— After fitting bearing in crank case, what would you do next?.838 

161— If the bearings are too tight, what is necessary to do?.838 

162— Are the rear main bearings fitted first?.838 





































87 


163—Should, the crank shaft first be fitted to the half of main bearing in crank 


case before proceeding to fit caps?.838 

164— Should the rear main bearing cap be fitted first, and how?..838 

164a-Is the center bearing then fitted in the same manner, but with the rear bearing 

off or aside?. 838 

164b-Is the front bearing then fitted in the same manner, but with the rear and 
center bearing off or laid aside?. 838 

165— State the fifth, sixth and seventh procedure.838 

166— State, briefly, the first, second, third and fourth procedures in “replacing a 

worn or damaged connecting rod bearing”.838 

167— How would you “adjust the bearing to crank pin”?. 839 

168— Would you draw the connecting rod bolts tight?.839 

169— How would you proceed to inspect the “oiling system” of an engine, using 

the Waukesha as an example?.834 

170— How would you “drain the oil”?.834 

171— How would you “test the oil flow”?.834 

172— How would you put oil in the engine?.834 

Timing the Valves. 

173— -How would you get at the gears?. 835 

174— -Is it necessary to “mark the gears”? Why?.835 

175— How would you proceed to “time the valves” of the Waukesha engine?.836 

176— What would be the first procedure?.836 

177— What would be the second procedure?.836 

178— What would be the third procedure?.836 

179— What would be the fourth procedure?.!.836 

180— What would be the fifth procedure?.....836 

181— How would you proceed to “time by position of the piston” if you are unable 

to get at the fly-wheel?.836 


Pistons. 

182— What are pistons made of?...645 

183— Do cast iron pistons expand under heat, less than aluminum alloy or steel 

pistons?...645 

184— What are “grooves” in pistons for?.645 

185— How many “rings” are usually fitted to the average piston?.645 

186 — Where great speed is desired, how are pistons arranged?.645 

187 — what are the advantages of “aluminum alloy” pistons?.645 

188— What are the drawbacks of “aluminum alloy” pistons?.651 

189— What is meant by “piston clearance”?.651 

190 — Does cast iron require less “clearance” than aluminum alloy? Why?.651 

191 — why is more “clearance” required at the top of a piston, and what is the 

usual graduation of clearance at bottom, middle and top?.651 

192— How much “clearance” is usually given to aluminum alloy pistons?.651 

193 — How much “clearance” is usually given a Ford piston?.793 

194— If pistons are fit close to cylinder wall, will it run quieter? Why?.651 


395—If driven at high speed is there a liability of piston expanding to such an 

extent that it is liable to stick or “seize”?.6 

195a—What is meant by “expanding?” See your dictionary. 

195b—What is meant by “contracting?” See your dictionary. 

195c-Does metal expand when heated and contract when cold? Yes. 





































88 

196— Should greater clearance be given to pistons on engines running at high 

speed?.651 

197— If the pistons do not fit tight in cylinders, what prevents the gas escaping 

to the crank case when under compression?.75 

Piston Rings. 

198— Are piston rings fitted tight in the grooves of piston?.654 

199— Are piston rings split? If so, for what reason?.651,655 

200— What is meant by a “concentric” piston ring?.654,651 

201— What is meant by an “eccentric” piston ring?.654,651 

202— Why are rings made “eccentric”?.....651 

203— Is the “groove” in piston where ring fits, slightly larger than the width of 

the ring? Why?.654 

204— Suppose the “groove” is too large, what is the result?.654 

205— Is it necessary that the rings expand, and should they expand equally at all 

points?.655 

206— If they do not, what is the result?. 655 

207— What permits the ring to expand?.655 

208— About how much of a “gap” is allowed when ring is in cylinder?.655 

209— If slit is too far apart, What would be the result?.-.655 

210— If rings should work around in the grooves, so that the slits in the rings 

should be in line, would this likely cause a leak?..655 

211— How could this be remedied?. 655 

211a-Why is it necessary to use more than one piston ring?.. .655 

212— Make a sketch of a “step-cut” piston ring.655 

213— Make a sketch of a “miter-cut” piston ring.655 

214— How does the “Leak-Proof” ring differ from the step or miter cut ring?....655 

215— How does the “Inland” ring differ from the step or miter cut ring?.655 

216— What are the results if piston rings are not equal in expansion on all of its 

surface?.655 

217— How would a leaky piston ring cause a loss of compression?.655 

218— If rings are in good condition how would they appear?.655 

219— If rings are dull and dirty in spots and streaks, what is the indication?... .655 

220— Name some of the causes of leaky piston rings.„. .656 

221— How would you determine if the rings leak?.656 

222— What is meant by a “gummed ring,” and. how is it Remedied?.656 

223— If a ring is “scratched,” what is necessary?.65C 

224— If cylinder wall is “cut or scratched,” what is necessary to do?.656 

225— If ring has lost its tension, what can be done to remedy it?.656 

226— Is it possible for an excess of oil to get into the com ( bustion-chamber, even 

though the rings be a tight fit?.653,652 

227— State how.653,652 

228— Can you tell when an engine is getting too much oil by the color of the smoke 

issuing from the exhaust?.652,203 

229— If the smoke is “black and foul-smelling,” what is the cause?.652,202 

230— If the smoke is “white or blue,” what is the cause?..652,202 

231— If the smoke is “gray,” what is the cause?.652, 202 

232— If spark plugs are constantly oil-soaked, what is the cause?.652,630 

233— What is meant by a “piston pumping oil”?.653,652 

234— How would you remedy this trouble?.652.653 









































89 


235— What method is used on Ford, pistons to remedy “piston pumping oil”?....793 

236— What is meant by “chamfer”?..793 

237— What is meant by “vacuum cause of piston pumping oil”?.652 

238— What is meant by vacuum? (See your dictionary.) 

239— If “blue smoke” is emitted from exhaust at “various speeds,” is it generally 

due to excess of oil or oil passing the rings?.652 

240— If it only occurs when engine is “running slow for long periods,” or “idling 

at the curb,” and then on “starting up from a standstill,” clouds of smoke 
come from the muffler, what is the cause?.652 

240a-What is meant by a “scored, cylinder”?.201,202 

241— What will cause the cylinder walls to become scratched or “scored”?.653, 201, 202 

(Note.—A common cause is due to piston ring working loose and cutting cylinder 
walls.) 

242— How is a “scored” cylinder remedied?.653 

242a^What is the result of a “scored cylinder,” and what are some of the indica¬ 
tions? .653,202 

243— What is the difference between “re-boring” and “reaming” a cylinder?-654 

244— What is the advantage and disadvantage of each?.654 

245— When a cylinder is “re-bored” or “reamed,” is it necessary to fit “oversize 

pistons and rings”? Why?.653 

246— if cylinders are not “scored” too deep, how could this be remedied without 

re-boring cylinder?.653 

247— What is meant by “lapping”?.653, 650 

248— What is the object or purpose of “lapping” piston rings and cylinders?-650 

249— If cylinders are “slightly scored” should they be lapped with an old piston?.650 

249a-What mixture is used for lapping?.650 

249b-What other compound could there be used? Ans. Flour of emery and engine 

or coal oil. If a fine finish, use crocus. 

250— If cylinder is “badly scored,” what should be done?.650 

(Note.—A scored cylinder can now be remedied, by electrically fusing a metal into 
the score, thus saving the time of reboring or reaming. This process is known as 
the “Lawrence process.”) 

251— if cylinder surfaces are in good condition, should only the rings be lapped? 


Why?.650 

252— Should an “expanding lapper” be used on badly scored cylinders?.650 

253 — should the “regular piston” that is to be used in the engine, be used for 

lapping?. 650 

254— Briefly state what the “lapping process” consists of.650 

255— How would you proceed to “remove a ring from piston groove”?.657 

256— What is meant by “poening” a piston ring, and when is it necessary?.657 

257 — When starting “to fit a set of piston rings,” what is the first operation?.. .657 

258_Why is it sometimes necessary to “file” a mitre cut ring?.657 

259— How much space should there be between “ends of ring,” and why?.657 

260— Should the ring be tried in the cylinder before fitting to piston? Why?.. .657 

261— How would you “lap” a ring to fit the cylinder?.657 

262— If ring did. not fit even all around in cylinder, how would you tell?.658 

263— When ring fits even all round in cylinder, then how much “opening” should 

there be between its two ends?.658 

264_If this opening or “gap” is too great, what is the result?.657 

265—If no opening or “gap” at all, what is the result?.658 































90 

266— After rings have been “fitted to cylinder,” what is the first thing to dcf to 

“fit them 1 to the'piston”?.658 

267— Should the rings “fit free in the grooves of piston”?.658 

268— If they “fit tight,” how would you dress them down?.658 

269— Is this process also called “lapping”?...658 

270— When “fitting rings in the groove,” which “groove” do you fit ring on first? 

. > .658, 659 

271— Is the “best fitting ring placed at the top”?.659 

272— How should the “joints of rings” be placed., and why?.659 

273— When replacing piston with rings on it, into cylinder, should cylinder oil 

be applied? Where?.659 

274— When replacing piston with rings on it in cylinder, is it necessary to hold 

the rings in the grooves so it will easily enter the cylinder? Why?.659 

275— When replacing cylinders “cast in pairs” or “in block,” over pistons, what 

is a good plan to follow?.659 

276— When installing, suppose the piston is pushed too far up into cylinder, what 

is the result?.659 

277— Are connecting rods liable to be bent when replacing cylinders, and what is 

the result?.*.659 

278— How would you test the “alignment” of pistons and connecting rods in order 

to see that they are not bent?.659 

279— After fitting bearings, pistons or rings, is it a good idea to “run them 

in”?.658,793,203,489 

280— What is meant by “running in”?..793,203,489 

281— When replacing a “cylinder head,” how should the bolts be tightened?.. .649, 717 
(Read pages 646, 647, 648. 649, 652, 654, carefully.) 

INSTRUCTION No. 46A. 

Repairing and Adjusting Clutches, Transmissions and Axles. 

1— Is it a good plan to keep your foot on “clutch pedal” when driving?.661 

2— How is a clutch damaged?.661 

3— W'hen car slows down almost to a standstill, is it hard on the clutch to “pick 

up,” if on “high gear”?.661 

4— What should be done?.661 

5— Is it best to “engage clutch gradually”?.661 

6— Is it best to slow down and speed up by use of the accelerator or throttle, or 
in other words, “run on the engine,” instead of constantly throwing the 
clutch “out” and “in”?.661 

7— Name the parts of a cone clutch. 661 

8— Briefly state the adjustments on a cone clutch.660 

9— Are “clutch pressure or plunger studs” provided on some of the cone clutches, 

and where are they placed?.660 

10— What are the “clutch rollers” for and where located?.660 

10a-What is a “clutch brake” for, and where is it usually located?.660,662 

(Read page 660 how a new leather is fitted to a cone clutch.) 

11— Name the different troubles a cone clutch is liable to have.661 

12— What is the cause of clutch “grabbing”?.661 

13— What is the cause of clutch “slipping”?. 661 

14— What is the cause of cone “clutch spinning”?.662 
































91 

15— What part “spins,” and how does it affect gear changing?.662 

16— What is the remedy?.662 

.17—Where are cone clutches generally lubricated.?.662 

18— If clutch fails to “release,” what is it termed, and what is the cause?.662 

19— If a cone clutch “slips,” how can it be remedied?.661, 662 

20— Should the tension of clutch spring be not too great? Why?.662 

21— If a cone clutch “slips,” what is a temporary remedy?.662 

22— Should the “clutch pedal” be properly adjusted?.662 

23— What is the method for adjusting a “disk clutch”?.663 

24— When a “lubricated type” of disk clutch slips, what is the remedy?.663 

25— If clutch still slips after this treatment, what would you do next?.663 

26— If slipping cannot be eliminated, then what is the next procedure?.663 

27— If the clutch of the lubricated disk type “grabs” or is “fierce,” what would 

you do to remedy it?.663 


27a-If a dry plate disk clutch “grabs,” what is the remedy? Ans. Inject a mixture of 
one-third kerosene and two-thirds lubricating oil into clutch through adjusting 
screw hole (A, page 842) with an oil gun. Ordinarily, merely injecting 
kerosene will suffice. 

28—Is it important that light weight oil be used in lubrication of disk clutches? 


Why?..663, 203 

(See questions on page 4 in this book, for the single dry plate clutch. See also 
pages 40, 42, 43, 668 and 842 of text book.) 

29— Is it sometimes a difficult matter to “compress the clutch spring”?.663 

30— What kind of a clutch is an “internal expanding” type?.663 

(Read pages 664, 665, 666, 667, carefully.) 

31— Briefly state some of the evidences of trouble in the “Borg & Beck” clutch..668 

32— Briefly state how you would “clean” same.....668 

33— Briefly state how you would “repair clutch brake”.668 

34— Briefly state how you would “remove clutch”.668 

35— Briefly state how you would “dismantle clutch”..668 

36— Briefly state how you would, “tighten and adjust the clutch”.842 


(Note.—On the “Borg & Beck” clutch the “throw-out” bearing is lubricated by a 
small hole in clutch shaft, from oil in the transmission case. If oil is too thick and 
gummy in transmission case, then this part cannot be oiled. 

36a-What type of clutch was there used on the first 50,000 Dodge cars? What 
type on later cars?. 6( 

36b-How many driven plates and how many drive plates are there in the Dodge dry 
disk clutch ? Ans. There are four driving disks supported on six pins riveted to 
fly-wheel and three driven disks carried on three pins riveted to clutch spider. 

36c-How is this clutch adjusted? Ans. By tightening the clutch spring, by moving 


split washers into one of three grooves on clutch shaft. 

37— What is meant by “gear-set”?.669 

38 — What are the usual troubles of transmission?. 669 

39 — What is the cause of dripping oil from gear case?. ..669 

40 — What part of a transmission are the “dogs”?.48,669 

41 — When “dogs” become worn, what is the result?.669 

42— What are some of the causes of noise?..669 

53 _if difficulty is experienced‘in shifting gears, state the three likely causes-669 


54 _if you suspect too much “end play” in transmission shaft, how can it be 

determined?. 6 































92 

55— How would you proceed to determine cause of “clashing gears”?...669 

56— What kind, of oil should be used in transmissions?.203 

57— What is the average ratio of the gears in a transmission?.669 

Rear Axle Pointers. 

58— Name the three types of rear axles in general use..669 

59— How would you tell the kind of an axle on different cars?.669 

60— What kind of an axle is there used on a Ford? (foot-note).780 

61— State the S.A.E. distinction between the “semi-floating,” “% floating,” and 

the “full floating” axles.669 

62— Briefly state the advantage of the “semi-floating” axle.669 

Pointers on Removal of Differential. 

63— In removing differential from a “semi-floating” axle and some “% floating” 

axles, must the entire rear axle be removed.?.669 

64— Is the axle housing “divided” in the center on above type of axles?.669 

65— Then how is the axle disassembled and differential removed?.669 

66— In removing or adjusting the differential on a “full-floating” axle, is it neces¬ 
sary to remove entire rear axle?.669,677 

67— Is the axle housing divided in center on a “full floating” axle?.669,677 

68— How are the “axle shafts” removed?.669 

69— How can the “differential then be withdrawn” from axle housing?.669,677 

70— How is the “differential fastened” to a “semi-floating” axle?.669 

71— How is a “differential fastened” to a full floating” axle?.669 

(Note.—Read pages 670, 671, 672, 673, 674, 675, 676, 677, 678, 679, carefully.) 

Ford Rear Axle and Differential. 

72— In “removing the differential” from a Ford car, must rear axle be removed?.780 

73— How would you proceed to remove rear axle”?.780 

74— How would you proceed to “remove axle shafts”?.780 

75— How would you proceed to “remove differential”?.781 

76— Is there a “fibre washer” between ends of axle shafts? (see fig. 28).781 

77— Are there “keys” near the ends of axle shafts?..781 

78— How would you proceed to remove the “drive pinion” from the “drive shaft” ?.780 

Rear Axle Adjustments. 

79— What is meant by “adjustment of gears” on a rear axle?.673 

80— State the three conditions of an axle that make it advisable to adjust the 

gears. 673 

80a-When there is an excessive grinding or humming noise in rear axle, what does 
this indicate?.675,676 

81— What is meant by “back-lash”?.673 

82— What would you do to eliminate noise, and what noise?.673 

82a-What would you do to “take up” “back-lash”?...673 

83— What would you do to “take up” looseness in bearings on pinion shaft?.673 

84— When is it necessary to replace the gears, and what gears?.673 

85— Is the axle shown on page 673 a “full floating axle”?.;. .673 

86— What type is the axle shown on page 674?.674 

87— What type is the axle shown on page 675, and why? (foot-note).675 

88— Before making an adjustment on the axle on page 674, for “elimination of 

noise” “or back-lash,” what should first be done?.674 



































93 


89— How would you proceed to “take up” on these bearings, where are they located, 

and what purpose do they serve?.. ..674 

90— How would you proceed to “adjust for elimination of noise”?.674 

91— How would you proceed to “adjust to take up back-lash”?.674 

91a-When are gears properly adjusted?.674 

(Read the “standard gear ratio” and “specifications of the axle” on page 674.) 

92— What type of axle is there used in the illustration on page 677?.677 

93— Is the axle housing “divided” in the center?.677 

94— How can differential be removed from this axle housing?.677 

95— How can the “Prussian blue test” be made with teeth of gears when adjusting 

the differential gears?.677 

96— What is meant by an “internal gear” drive axle?.678 

97— How does it differ from other types of axles?.678 

98— What kind of cars is it used on most?.678 

99— Are the adjustments similar to other axles?.678 

100— How is “oil leakage from rear axle” prevented?.678 

101 — Oil or grease working out through brake drums, from rear axle causes what 

kind of trouble? (foot-note).678,685 

Rear Wheels. 

102— How are wheels attached to the axle of the Studebaker car? Page.679 

103— Is this a “full-floating” type axle?.679 

104— Can “axle shafts” be withdrawn, without removing wheels?.679 

105— How is the “wheel bearing” adjusted?.679 

106— How are the Cadillac rear wheels removed?.679 

(Note.—You can find out if axles on different cars are “full, semi, or three-quarter 
floating” type, by referring to pages 543 to 546.) 

107 — how are rear wheels removed from a “semi-floating” axle?.781 

INSTRUCTION No. 46B. 

Adjusting Wheels, Brakes and Steering. 

1— How would, you test for “play” in front wheels?.681,680 

2— If a click is heard when turning front wheel, what will likely be the cause?. .681 

3— Name the parts of a front axle as shown in fig. 5, page 680...680 

4 — what is the procedure for adjusting ball bearings on front wheels?.680 

5 — what is the procedure for adjusting roller bearings on front wheels?...680, 687 

6— How is the Timken roller bearing adjusted?.687 

7 — if grease runs out between hub and steering knuckle, what is the cause?... .680 

8— What should you do before replacing front wheel?..680 

9 — How often and how would, you lubricate front wheels?.681 

10— Should “hub caps” be kept tight?. 681 

/ Note —Where wire wheels are used of the interchangeable type it is very necessary 
that the hub caps be drawn very tight, else a clicking noise will be heard and probable 
damage to bearings will result.) 

11— Suppose a spoke is loose on a wood wheel, what would this result in?.810 

(Note._Loose spokes cause an intermittent noise as wheel revolves. As wheel 

revolves faster, the noise becomes more steady.) 

12— How could it be remedied?. 810 

13 — what are “universal joints” used for?.43 

13a-Explain, briefly, what attention should be given to universal joints.681 

14— What kind of lubrication is best for universal joints?.681,680 

15— How often is it advisable to fill this joint?.680 




































94 

16— Where and how is the lubricant injected into the Spicer universal joint?-680 

17— Is it filled full, or two-thirds full?..680 

18— Is the propeller end of drive shaft fitted with splines, which fit into a sleeve of 

universal joint, and does this “splined shaft” slip back and forth?.680 

(Note.—Sectional view illustration showing the ‘splines.” Splines are used for the 
same purpose as keys in a shaft; but are not fitted in key ways—they are cut or 
milled into the shaft and square grooves are cut in the sleeve for the splines to fit into. 
Study page 680 carefully.) 

19— What is necessary to do if a knock or rattle or jerking motion comes from a 

worn universal joint?..685 

20— How would you test for lost motion in a front wheel?.682 

21— How would you proceed to “true up a front wheel”?.682 

22— How would you “test a rear wheel bearing”?.*..682 

Alignment of Wheels. 

23— What is meant by ‘‘alignment of wheels”?.683 

24— Why is it important that wheels be properly lined up?.683 

25— How would you proceed to “line up springs with the axle”?.683 

26— How would you “line up the front and rear wheels”?.683 

27— What is meant by “camber” of the front wheels?.683 

28— What is the purpose of front wheels being properly cambered?.683 

29— How are front wheels usually “cambered”?.683 

30— If wheels are out of true and are wobbly, what is likely the cause?.683 

31— What is meant by “toe-in” of front wheels?.683 

32— How can “toe-in” be adjusted?.....683 

33— How would you check the “toe-in”?.683 

34— What should the “toe-in” be in a Dodge, measured on felloe of wheels, level 

with the hub?..683 

35— Should the front and rear wheels “track,” and how would you determine the 

fact, if they did not “track”?..683 

36— Should spring clips be kept tight? If so, why?.683 

37— Why do tires sometimes have worn places around the tread?.683 

38— Why does a right rear tire wear faster than others..683 

Brakes. 

39— State the three general classifications of the brake mechanism..685 

40— State the different methods of the operation of the brake mechanism.685 

40a-How is the external brake usually operated, and what is the pedal called which 

operates it?. 685 

41— How is the “external brake” usually operated, and what is the pedal called 

which operates it?.685 

42— How is the “internal brake” usually operated, and what is the lever called 

which operates it?.685 

43— Where “metal to metal” brakes are used is a constant supply of oil required?.685 

44— What material is best for “brake lining”?.685 

44a-Is asbestos of a mineral or a vegetable composition?.685 

45— What are the causes of slipping brakes?.685 

46— How can slipping brakes be remedied?.685 

47— If brake lining is worn badly, what is necessary to do?.685 

48— Does “holding brakes on” for a long time heat the lining?.685 

49— If when applying brakes, the car has a tendency to “skid,” what is likely the 

cause?.685,495 





































50— Is it best to apply brakes gradually when car “skids”?.685 

51— If the brake “squeaks,” what is the cause?. 685 

52— What parts of a brake require oil?.685 

53— In adjusting brakes, what is the first thing to do?.691 

54— How would you test the brakes to see if band or lining is worn?.691 

55— What is meant by “clearance adjustment” of an external brake?...691 

56— What is the purpose of “clearance adjustment” of an external brake?.691 

57— What is the proper clearance?.691 

58— If brake band drags at any other point, how would you clear it?.691 

59— Do many repairmen adjust the brakes with the “wheels on the ground”? 

Why?. 691 

60— How would you adjust the “internal brakes”?.691,686,687 

61— Why does the “foot-brake” require more adjusting?.691 

62— What is the “hand-brake” used for most?.691 

63— How would you test the “bake pedal” for adjustment?.691 

64— How is brake lining usually measured and sold?.691 

65— What kind of a brake is there shown on page 684?.684 

66— If brakes do not hold, what might be the cause?.684 

67— If brakes do not hold securely, could it be due to “insufficient forward travel” 

of the brake rod?.'.** 84 

68— If brakes drag, could this be due to “insufficient backward travel” of the 

brake rod?. 684 

69 — How would the last two mentioned troubles be remedied?.684 

70 — j n adjusting external brakes of the Timken type, what would be the first 

thing to do?.. 684 

71— What is next?. 684 

72— Before making adjustments what should be seen to first?.684 

73 — Would you adjust the clearance next?.684 

74 — Would you adjust the lower half of brake first?.684 

75 — If so, how?. ^ 84 

76— How would you then adjust the upper half?.684 

77 — What kind of internal brake is there shown on page 686 ?. 686 

78 — What kind of internal brake is there shown on page 687?..687 

79 _Briefly state how you would adjust the “cam” type internal brake. 686 

go—Briefly state how you would adjust the “toggle” type internal brake.687 

Relining Brakes. 

81 —Name the three things essential to the care of brakes.688 

82_How can grease be removed from brake linings?. 688 

83— If brake band is too badly worn, what is necessay to do?. 688 

84— State what you would do first in relining a band brake of the external type ?.688 

85 — state the second and third procedures. 688 

86 — How would you measure the lining?... *> 88 

87— How would you mark the lining for the holes?. 688 

88 — How would you secure the lining to the band?.,. 688 

89— Should the holes be countersunk, if so, how, and why?. 688 

90— How would you place the rivets?. 689 

91 _Does the rivet head go next to the fabric, and is the riveting done on the 

band side?..*.^ 

92—When riveting “external” brakes, how would you start?. b8y 












































96 


93— When riveting “internal’' brakes, how would you start?.689 

94— What kind of rivets are used?.689 

95— Briefly state the procedure of relining Dodge brakes. v .689 

96— Briefly state the procedure of adjusting Dodge external brakes.689 

97— Briefly state the procedure of adjusting Dodge internal brakes.689 

98— What material is there required for a Dodge relining job?.689 

99— What kind of brakes are there on the Buick “Light Six”?.689 

100— What brake does the foot pedal connect with?.689 

101— What brake does the “hand lever” connect with?.689 

102— Briefly state procedure for adjusting the “foot” or “service” brake.689 

103— Briefly state how you would adjust the “hand” or “emergency” brake.689 

(Note.—Read carefully, miscellaneous matter on page 690.) 

Steering Gear Adjustment 

104— Name the different kinds of steering gear mechanism.691 

105— What kind of a steering device is the “bevel” type?.691,692 

106— What part of a steering device usually requires adjusting?.691 

107— How would you proceed to adjust the “worm and wheel” type?.691 

108— Name the make of steering devices using a “worm and wheel”.692,693 

109— How would you proceed to adjust the “worm and nut” type of steering 

device?.691 

110— Name the make of steering devices using the “worm and nut” principle.692, 693 

111— Does a tight adjustment cause difficult steering?.691 

112— About how much play is permissible in steering wheel?.691 

113— Do steering devices require plenty of lubrication? What kind, and how?... .691 

114— Should all parts of steering device and rods and parts connected to it be well 
lubricated? Yes. 

115— If wheels are out of “alignment,” will this make steering harder?.683 

116— If gears have become worn after long usage, so that adjustment will not prove 

satisfactory, how can one save the expense of new gears?.690 

117— What kind of a steering device is the Jacox?.692 

118— What kind of a steering device is used on the Maxwell?.693 

119— What kind of a steering device is used on the Studebaker?.693 

120— What kind of a steering device is used on the Buick?.693 

121— What kind of a steering device is used on the Overland?.693 

122— What kind of a steering device is used on the Dodge?.693 

(Read carefully, page 693, how to adjust each.) 


INSTRUCTION No. 46C. 

How to Use Tools and Make Repairs. 

(Read page 695, how to solder aluminum, how to case harden, how to temper drills, 
tempering steel and brazing. All of this is a matter of reference when needed, there¬ 


fore questions will not be asked on same.) 

Measurements. 

1— What is meant by the “thousandth part of an inch”?.697 

2— What is meant by the figures “.020”?.697 

3— How would you read decimals?.697 

4— What do the following figures mean: .3?.697 

5— What do the following figures mean: .03?.697 

6 — What do the following figures mean.: .003?.697 





































97 


7— What parts of an ignition system are usually measured in “thousandths part 

, of an inch”?. v .697 

8 — What is a “thickness gauge” for?.699,697 

9— What is a “micrometer” for?. 698 

10— What is the difference between a “Vernier caliper” and, a “micrometer 

caliper”?. 698 

(Read pages 698 and 699 carefully.) 

11— What is a “drill gauge” for?. 699 

12— What is the first row of figures for on gauge? Page.699 

13— What is the second row of figures for on gauge? Page.699 

14— What are the figures from 1 to 60 (turned sideways) for?.669 

15— What are the figures 228, 221, etc., under the holes for?.669 

16— Suppose you had a cap screw, and saw by referring to table No. 100 (page 

703) that it required 10x32 tap, how would you find the proper drill to use 
with this gauge?.699 

17— What divisions are machinists’ steel rules of 6 -inch length usually divided 

into?.700 

18— What is a “screw pitch gauge” for?.700 

19— Name the different kinds of chisels.700 

20— What is a “center punch” used for?. 700 

21— What is a “cold chisel” for?.700 

22— What is a “cape chisel” used, for, mostly?.700 

23— What is a “diamond point chisel” used for, mostly?.700 

24— What is a “scriber” used for, mostly?.700 

Bolts, Screws and Nuts. 

25— Are nuts generally used on cap screws?.701 

26— Are nuts generally used on bolts?.701 

27— What kinds of nuts are used on bolts?.701 

28— Where is the measurement of the diameter of a bolt or screw usually taken?.701 

29— What is the difference between the U.S.S. and S.A.E. capscrew?.701 

30— What is the difference between the S.A.E. bolt and the S.A.E. cap screw?..701 

31 — what is the difference between a “capscrew” and a “machine bolt”?.701 

32— What is the difference between an S.A.E. bolt and U.S.S. cap screw?.701 

33 — "What is the difference between a U.S.S. bolt and U.S.S. cap screw?.701 

34— What is the difference between a machine screw and a machine bolt?.701 

35 — will a wrench that fits a U.S.S. cap screw fit an S.A.E. cap screw?.701 

(Read the other paragraphs on page 701 about wrenches.) 

36— What is a “stud” and where is it usually placed?.701 

37 — What are “taper-pins” for?. 701 

38— What are “set-screws” for?. 701 

(Note illustrations of other kinds of bolts and screws on page 701.) 

Thread. 

39 — Make a sketch of fig. 8 and name the parts of a thread.702 

40 — What is meant by the “angle” of a thread?.702 

41 — What is meant by the “pitch” of a thread?.702 

42— What is meant by the “root diameter”?.702 

43 — What is meant by the “basic diameter”?.702 





































98 

44— What is the difference between the “sharp V thread” (U.S.S.) and the “Whit¬ 
worth oval” thread?. 

45— What is meant by the “flat” of a thread?.^02 

46— What kind of a thread is the U.S.S. and S.A.E.?.702 

47— What is the difference between the U.S.S. and S.A.E. threads?...702 

48— How can the number of threads to an inch be measured?.702 

49— What is meant by the “pitch” of a thread?.702 

50— Where are fine threaded screws used most?.702 

51— Where are coarse threaded screws used most?.703 

52— Wbat kind of thread is there used most for bolt work?. 702 

53— What kind of thread is there used most for pipe work?.702 

54— What are tables 101, and 102, page 703, for?..702,703 

55— Is the “sharp V thread” favored much?.702 

56— Is the length of thread on a cap screw more than on a bolt?.702 

57— What is the purpose of table No. 100?....703 

58— What is each column for?.703 

59— Do you understand tables Nos. 101, 102 and 103 thoroughly?.703 

60— State what each column is for..• ••.703 

61— How many threads per inch has a ^4-inch S.A.E. tap?.703 

62— How many threads per inch has a *,4-inch U.S.S. tap?. 703 

63— How many threads per inch has a ^-inch pipe tap?.703 

64— Do S.A.E. cap screws have a finer thread, consequently more to the inch?.. .703 

Dies. 

65— What is a “die” for?. ; .-704 

66 — What two classes are dies divided into?.704 

67— Are dies also adjustable?.704 

68 — How are dies marked?....704 

69— What is meant by “clearance of a bolt or nut”?..704 

70— What is a “die stock” for?. 704 

71— What is a “screw plate set”?.704 

72— Can threads be cut on a lathe?.704 

73— When a thread is cut on the outside as (9), is it called a male thread, and 

when inside (12), a female thread?.704 

Screw Taps. 

74— What are “screw taps” for?.704 

75— What are “machinist’s hand taps” used for?. 704 

76— What are “pipe taps” used for?. 704 

77— What is the difference between a %-inch “machinist’s hand tap” and a %-inch 

“pipe tap”?.....704 

78— What is a “taper tap” for?.704 

79— What is a “follower tap” for?..704 

80— What is a “bottoming tap” for?.704 

81— What are “flutes” in a tap, and what is the object of same?. ... .704 

82— Briefly state how you would use a tap...705 

83— What kind of lubricant would you use?.,.705 

84— How would you make a tap cut oversize?.705 

85— How are taps marked?.705 

86 — What sizes do taps run in, from No. 1 to 30?.705 












































99 

87— What sizes do taps run in, numbers above 30?.705 

88 — What size taps are used most?.705 

89— What size is the maximum used in auto work?.705 

90— What size tap is used for i^-inch spark plugs?.705 

91— What size taps is used for S.A.E. %-18 spark plug?.705 

Drills. 

92— What are twist drills used for?.706 

93— What are flute drills used for?... .706 

94— What is the “shank” of a drill?.706 

95— Where are “straight shank” drills used?.706 

96— Where are “taper shank” drills used?.706 

97— What size drills use a No. 1 taper shank?..706 

98— What size drills use a No. 2 taper shank?.706 

99— What size drills use a No. 3 taper shank?.706 

100— What size drills use a No. 4 taper shank?.706 

101— Are drills from iy 2 " to 80 numbered and lettered?.706 

lOla-Is a No. 80 drill larger or smaller than a No. 70?.706 

102— What size (in thousandths of an inch) is a No. 80 drill?.706 

103— Do drills from No. 80 to No. 1 bear numbers or letters to indicate their size?.706 

104— How. do drills No. 80 to No. 1 range in size?.706 

105— What size (in inches or parts of an inch) is a No. 1 drill?.706 

106— Suppose you wished to drill a hole for a tap to cut a ^4-inch U.S.S. thread 

with a pitch of 20 threads, what size drill would you use? (table 101).703 

107— What size or number of* tap would you use to tap a ^4-inch U.S.S. thread?. .703 

108— How would you find the number of drill to use for a ^-inch U.S.S. tap?.703 

109— Suppose a tap was marked “14-20,” what would this designate?.703 

110— What size tap would you use for a ^-inch S.A.E. thread? (table 102).703 

111 — Suppose it was not marked ^-inch, but had a number on it, what would that 

number likely be?..703 

112— Would the same tap which would tap a U.S.S. ^-inch thread, tap an S.A.E. 

thread? What would be the difference? (table 102).703 

113— What size or number of drill would be used for a ^-inch S.A.E. tap? (table 

102 )..703 

114 — What size (in fractions of an inch) is a No. 4 drill? (foot-note).703 

H 5 —Would the same drill do for either a U.S.S. or S.A.E. tap? (under table 102).703 

(Note the drill gauge (page 699) will instantly tell the size drill to use for different 
size taps. It will also tell the size drill from 1 to 45 in decimals. For instance, a 
No. 1 drill is .228.) 

116—If a tap is marked “J4-20,” what would this mean?.705 

417 —if a tap is marked “%-28,” what would this mean?.705 

Hg—Suppose you wished to tap for a “pipe thread” of ^4-inch size, what size drill 
would you use? (table 103).703 

119 _What is the decimal equivalent of 27-64ths? (table 106).706,541 

120 _What size tap would be required for cutting a thread in this size hole?.703 

121 _How many thousandths of an inch would this tap differ from the Mi-inch tap?.703 

122 —State a simple method of finding the size drill to use for tapping (fig. 1)-706 

123 _Briefly state the four factors necessary in sharpening drills.707 

124— Briefly state how you would proceed to drill.707 

125 — How would you measure the length of “cutting lip” of a drill?.707 

i % 

% > ) 

> * > 





































100 


126— How would you measure the “angle” of a drill?.707 

127— What kind of an edge is a “beveled edge”?.707 

(Read carefully, 9 to 17, under “Drilling - ,” page 707.) 

128— How would you lay out work for drilling?..707 

129— What is meant by “scribed”?.707 

130— When drilling a piece of thick metal, and drill has a tendency to bore 

crooked or off center, how can it be re-centered?.707 

131— What are “reamers” for?.706 

132— What kind is a “taper reamer”?.706 

133— What is meant by “draw filing”?.708,643 

134— What are “keys” (as used on shafts) for?.708 

135— Name the different kinds.708 

136— What kind of a key is a “Woodruff key”?.708 

137— What kind of a key-way does a Woodruff key require?.709 

138— What is a “drift”?.709 

(Read and thoroughly study pages 709, 710 and 711.) 

Soldering. 

139— What is a “soldering copper”?.711 

140— By what other name is it mostly known? (fig. 2).711 

141— Must a soldering copper be “tinned”?.711 

142— What is meant by “tinning,” and how is it done?.711 

143— What is necessary to do a good soldering job?.711 

144— How is soldering acid prepared?.711 

145— Must a soldering copper be red hot?.711 

146— What is meant by “hard soldering”?.711 

147— What is meant by “soft soldering”?.711 

148— What is a “blow torch” for?.711 

149— Briefly state how you would fill and operate a blow torch.735 

150— What is the difference between a “blow torch,” as shown on page 735, and a 

“brazing torch,” shown on page 712?.712 

151— Could gas be used to heat a soldering iron?.696 

152— What is a “ladle?”. .....696 

153— What is meant by “wiping a joint”?.712 

154— What is meant by “annealing”?....713 

155— How would you proceed to anneal copper tubing?.713 

156— What kind of a metal saw would you use for iron and steel?.713 

157— What kind of a metal saw would you use for brass and soft metals?.713 

158— What kind of a metal saw would you use for brass or steel tubing?.713 

(Read page 714 carefully. Read page 715, how to test radiators.) 

Gaskets. 

159— What are gaskets used for?.717 

160— State the different kinds. 717 

161— Where are copper or brass gaskets generally used?.717 

162— Is paper sometimes used for gaskets?.. 

(Read page 716 carefully; how to cut gaskets.) 

163— What is shellac used for?.. 

164— How would you mix shellac?. 716 

(Note illustration on page 738 showing a convenient method for keeping shellac air¬ 
tight.) 









































165— Where are gaskets used on spark plugs? 

166— What kind of a gasket is used?. 


101 


717,235 
....239 


Oxy-Acetylene Welding. 


167— Name the two types of oxy-acetylene outfits. 

168— What do the parts of the stationary outfit consist of?. 

169— What do the parts of the portable outfit consist of?. 

170— Briefly state how a weld is made. 

171— How is acetylene usually supplied?. 

172— What is meant by “autogenous welding”?. 

173— Name the parts of a welding outfit?. 

174— How is the “welding flame” obtained?. 

175— How is the welding flame adjusted?. 

176— What is the temperature of the oxy-acetylene flame?. 

177— Why is “pre-heating” necessary, and what does it mean?... 

178— What are “filling rods” used for?. 

179— What are “fluxes” used for?. 

180— What determines the size of the “blow pipe tip”?. 

181— Is most of the so-called “wrought iron,” mild steel?. 

Read carefully how to weld mild steel. 

Read carefully how to weld hard steel. 

Read carefully how to weld nickel steel. 

Read carefully how to weld vanadium steel. 

Read carefully how to weld chrome steel... 

Read carefully how to weld malleable cast iron. 

Read carefully how to prepare parts for welding. 

Read carefully how to weld cast aluminum. 

Read carefully how to weld copper, bronze, brass and lead. 

Read carefully how to weld in a patch. 

Read page 720 carefully. Note the flame in fig-. 4. 

182— State some of the other uses for a welding flame. 

1 83— What is meant by “oxy-acetylene cutting”?. 

184— is an “oxygen regulator” used where material to be cut 

thick?. 

185 — state the two kinds of oxy-acetylene cutting blow pipes- 

(Read pages 724, 725, 726, 727.) 

186— Can oxy-hydrogen be used for welding and cutting?. 

187 — What is the “oxygen decarbonizer” used for?. 


.718 

.718 

.718 

.718 

.718 

.719 

.719 

.719 

.719 

.719 

.719,721 

.719 

.719 

.719 

.721 

..721 

.721 

.721 

.721 

.721 

.721 

.721 

.721, 723 

.723 

.723 

.723 

.724 

is over 3 inches 

.724 

.724 


.725 

727,726,624 


Silent Chains. 

188—What are silent chains used for?.. 

188a—State various methods of adjusting the tension of silent chains 
(Read pages 728 and 729 carefully.) 


21, 89,728, 729,411 
.728 


INSTRUCTION No. 46D. 

Useful Shop Hints and Devices. 

The matter under this instruction is mostly miscellaneous, therefore questions 
will not be asked, but it is advisable to read each and every page carefully. 





































102 


INSTRUCTION No. 47. 

Commercial Cars. 

1— Is the truck constructed along the same line as a pleasure car? How does 

it differ?. 747 

2 — What are the two usual motive powers of trucks?. 747 

3 — what type of engine do most trucks employ?. 747 

4 — What is the difference between the “worm drive” and the “chain drive” truck?.747 

5 — Does a chain driven truck use a solid or “dead” rear axle?.747, 14 

6 — Does a worm driven truck use a “live” rear axle?. 747 > 44 

7 — what are the disadvantages of double chain drive?. 49 

8 — Is the worm gear drive considered best?. 49 

9 — What is the average speed of a truck of ^-ton capacity?.747 

10 — What is the average speed of a truck of 5-ton capacity?.747 

11 — Briefly state the cause of wear of chains. 749 

12— How is a chain cleaned and lubricated?. 749 

13— How would you adjust chain tension?. 749 

14 — what kind of tires are generally used on trucks?.749,560,561 

15— How does the “Jeffrey Quad” truck differ from the usual type of truck?.748 

16— How are the front wheels driven?. 748 

16a-How are the rear wheels driven?. 748 

16b-How many differentials are used, and what kind of front axle and rear axle is 

there used?. 748 

17 — How is the steering of the four wheels accomplished?.748 

(Read page 748 carefully.) 

IS—How would you “take in” or “let out” on wheel alignment of front wheels?. .750 

19 — Briefly state how you would remove rear wheels on the Sheldon truck axle 

shown on page 750. 7 50 

20 — Briefly state how you would remove “worm" and “worm wheel carrier”.750 

2 1— is the “worm” above the “worm wheel” on this axle?..750 

22— How often would you drain oil from rear axle, and what kind of oil would you 

put into it?. 759 

23— How would you adjust the foot brake?. 7 51 

24 — How would you tighten up on the brake levers?.751 

25— Briefly state what you would do when using engine as a brake on low gear 

on a hill. 7 ^ 4 

(Read other subjects of page 751 carefully.) 

26— What are “trailers” for?.•.746 

27— How does a “hydraulic hoist” operate?.746 

28— How does the Ford truck differ from the Ford touring car?.825 

29 — ig the operation of a truck similar (in most respects) to a pleasure car?.749 

30 — is magneto ignition often used on truck engines?.749 

Governors. 

31— Are truck engines sometimes fitted with governor?. 839 

32— What other kinds of engines are governors often used on?.839 

33— State the two reasons why governors are used.839 

34 — state the different methods for driving governors.839 

35— What is meant by “transmission drive”?.839 

36— What is meant by “engine drive”?.83.9 





































103 

37— What is meant by “dual drive”?.$39 

38— Briefly explain the principle of the Pierce governor?.840 

39— Briefly explain the principle of the Simplex and Duplex governor?.841 

40— What difference is there between the Duplex and the Simplex governor?.841 

41— Briefly explain the principle of the Monarch governor.841, 842 

42— How does it differ from the Pierce and Simplex governor?.841 

43— What is meant by a “throttling” type governor?.757 

44— What is meant by a “hit and miss” type governor?.757 

45— On a stationary engine, when is the “hit and miss” principle generally used?. .757 

46— When is the “throttling type” generally used?.757 


47— Would the Pierce, Simplex and Monarch be the “throttling” type?. 839, 840, 841, 842 

48— The difference then in using a “throttling” type of governor on automobile 
engine and using it on a stationary engine would be in the fuel used, would 
it not? 

(This does not hold true for all stationary engines, as some use gasoline fuel and a 
throttling type governor.) 

49— What is the difference between a “throttling” type governor and a “hit and 

miss” governor?.757 

50— Briefly explain the principle of the governor used on the Waukesha engine.. 835 


INSTRUCTION No. 48. 

T ractors. 

(The student is not required to answer questions on the tractor subject unless he so 
desires.) 

1 — What kind of engines are there used on tractors?.753,831,832,833 

2— Is the tractor engine subjected to harder usage than an automobile engine? 

Why? (foot-note). 753 

3— How are tractors usually driven?. 753 

4 — Briefly explain the 10 tractor designs shown on page.752 

5 — what kind of work must a tractor do?.752 

6 — Does “belt work” represent half of the work of a tractor engine?.753 

7 — What size tractor is best for average work?.753 

8 — Briefly state how you would determine the power to use for different soil, 

and why.. 75S 

9 — what kind of a carburetor is generally used on a tractor?.754 

10— Is kerosene sometimes used?... • • • -754 

lOa-If kerosene is used as a fuel, how is engine first started?.754,828 

11 — Must the kerosene be heated? How, and why?.754 

12 — Is water sometimes used? How, and why?....754 

13— Briefly explain the principle of the Kingston kerosene carburetor...754 

14 Whv are two carburetor bowls, or float chambers used, and how are they 

used?. 754 

15— What is an “air washer” for?. 828 

16 — Briefly explain the principle. 828 

17 — Briefly explain the principle of the Holley vaporizer.827 

18 — What kind of an engine is used on the Ford tractor .826 

19 — How is the Ford tractor driven?.. 826 

21— Name the parts of a Ford tractor. 826 

22— is the Ford tractor a “worm drive” system?.826 


































104 

23— Where is the “worm gear drive” placed?.826 

24— What part does the “worm gear” drive?.826 

25— What is the “worm wheel” attached to?.826 

26— How is the Ford tractor steered?....826 

27— What kind of drive wheels has the Ford tractor?.826 

28— What kind of transmission is there used on the Ford tractor?.826 

29— What kind of fuel does the Ford tractor engine use?.826, 827 

30— Is gasoline used for starting?..826,827,831 

31 — what does the compression vary from, on tractor engines using kerosene 

Jluel?...827 

32— What is the average compression which is considered best, when kerosene is 

used?.827 

33— Does kerosene require more than a heated carburetor, if so, what else should 

be heated?.,.831 

34— Does kerosene have a tendency to condense, if so, what trouble would this 

cause?.831 

35— When engine smokes excessively from exhaust, and smoke is black, what does 

this indicate?.831 

36— For a heavy tractor to travel over all kinds of roads, is it necessary that it lay 

its own track, and why?.829 

37— Name the different kinds of treads employed.829 

38— Briefly explain what is meant by a “flat wheel tread”.829 

39— Briefly explain what is meant by a “chain tread”.829 

40— Briefly explain what is meant by a “rail track tread”.829 

41— What is the weight of tractor supported upon when a rail track tread is used?.829 

42— How is the chain driven?.829 

43— What is the difference between the “chain tread” and the “rail track” tread?.829 
(Study fig. 4. page 829, carefully.) 

44— What is meant by a “caterpillar” tractor?.829,830 

45— Briefly state the names of parts of the caterpillar tractor shown on page-830 

46— How is the transmission of power to drive system 1 usually arranged on a 

tractor?. 831 

47— What type of clutches are generally used?.831 

48— Is a “clutch lever” used instead of a “clutch pedal” quite often?.831 

49— How many speed changes are there usually in transmission?.831 

50— What speed does the “Twin-City” tractor, page 830, travel when on “high¬ 
speed”? .830 

51— What speed does it travel when on “low speed”?.830 

52— What speed does it travel when on “reverse”?.830 

Read specifications of the Twin City carefully.830 

53— How are tractors steered?.....831 

54— When there are three wheels to a tractor, how is it steered?.831 

55— When there are four wheels to a tractor, how is it steered?.831 

56— What is the weight of the Cleveland tractor, and would it be termed a light 

tractor?.831,830 

57 — Where is the power plant located on the Cleveland tractor?.831 

58— What size engine is there used on the Cleveland tractor?.831 

59— What speed does engine crank revolve when tractor travels 4 m.p.h.?.831 

60— What speed does engine crank revolve when tractor travels 3 y 2 m.p.h.?.831 





































105 

61— What type of clutch is there used, on the Cleveland tractor?.831 

61a-What type of carburetor is there used on the Cleveland tractor?.831 

62— Does the Twin City tractor engine use gasoline to start on, and kerosene to 

run on?.832 

63— Is a Stewart vacuum system, as explained on page 165, used with this engine?.832 

64— What size are the engine cylinders?.832 

65— What is the speed of engine?.832 

66 — Is a governor fitted to this engine?...832 

67— What does the governor operate in the carburetor, and would it be the “throt¬ 
tling” type?.832 

68 — What heats the carburetor mixture?.832 

69— What type of ignition system* is there used, on this engine?.832 

70— How does the K.W., model H magneto, differ from the HK?.832 

71— How does the K.W., model HK magneto, differ from the HT?.832 

72— How does the K.W., model HT magneto, differ from the HTK?.832 

73— What is meant by an “impulse starter”?.832 

74— Where is the K-W Impulse starter located?.832 

75— Briefly explain the action of impulse starter.832 

76— What is the advantage of impulse starter?.832 

INSTRUCTION No. 49. 

Other Types of Engines. 

(Note.—Student is not required to answer these questions under Instruction 49 unless 
he so desires.) 

Motorcycle. 

1 — What kind of engines are generally used on motorcycles?.755 

2 — Are air cooled cylinders generally used?.755 

3— At what angle are “twin cylinders” usually placed?.755 

4 — When cylinders are at an angle of 42 degrees, and No. 1 piston is on top of 

compression stroke, where is the piston of the other cylinder?.846 

5 — jf No. 1 fires and travels 42 degrees on its power stroke, where is No. 2 piston ?.846 

6 — if No. 1 piston makes a complete revolution, how far in degrees will it have 

traveled?. 84 ** 

7 — how far in degrees will No. 2 piston have traveled?.846 

8 — Therefore, when No. 1 travels 360 degrees, must No. 2 travel 360 degrees plus 
42 degrees, or 402 degrees before it fires, or No. 1 will fire again, 318 degrees 

after No. 2 fires? Is this correct?. 846 

(Read page 846 carefully.) 

9 — How are the connecting rods usually placed when twin cylinders are used?. .755 

40 —what kind of transmission is there used on some motorcycles?.845,844 

44 _Are they 2 and 3 speed, and similar to an automobile transmission?-844,845 

42 _What kind of a device is a “neutral counter shaft,” and what is it for?.844 

43 —How is engine started, on the motorcycle, fig. 1, page 844, when a one-speed 

device is used?. 844 

14—How is starting accomplished when a three-speed gear box is used?.844 

45 —where is the Indian starter operated?. 844 

46 _What kind of a clutch is there used on the Indian motorcycle?.845 

17—Explain its operation. 845 

48 —What kind of a carburetor is there used?. 845 


































106 


19— Briefly explain its principle.845 

20— What does the right handle bar grip (fig. 2) control?.844 

21— What does the left handle bar grip (fig. 2) control?.844 

22— What kind of ignition is used?.844 

23— How is the clutch controlled?.844 

24— How would you proceed to start the engine on the three-speed model (Harley 

Davidson)?. 843 

25— Briefly explain the electric system.843 

26— Briefly explain the action of the “vacuum controller” formerly used.843 

27— What type, size, and at how many degrees angle are cylinders placed on the 

Indian engine?.Insert No. 3 

28— What type, size, and at how many degrees angle are cylinders placed on the 

Harley Davidson engine?.Insert No. 3 

29— What is the bore and stroke of the engine shown, of the Indian? Insert No. 3 

30— What is the bore and stroke of the engine shown, of Harley Davidson? 

.Insert No. 3 

31— How are the valves placed on the Indian?.Insert No. 3 

32— How are the valves placed on the Harley Davidson?.Insert No. 3 

33— Briefly explain the action of the inlet valve on the Indian.Insert No. 3 

34— Briefly explain the action of the inlet valve on the Harley Davidson. 

.*...Insert No. 3 

35— Briefly explain the action of the exhaust valve on the Indian... .Insert No. 3 

36— Briefly explain the action of the exhaust valve on the Harley Davidson. 

..Insert No. 3 

37— What is meant by a “compression relief,” and where located on the Indian? 

.Insert No. 3 

38— What is the purpose of the “compression relief” on the Indian?. .Insert No. 3 

39— Is there an “exhaust compression relief” on the Harley Davidson, and where 

is it located, and what controls it?.Insert No. 3 

40— Is there a “crank case compression relief” on the Harley Davidson, and where 
is it located, and what purpose does it serve? Explain its action. .Insert No. 3 

41— Briefly state the path or flow of oil of the Harley Davidson.Insert No. 3 

42— How would you increase the oil supply?.Insert No. 3 

(Note.—Study the ignition system of the Indian on this No. 3 Insert and also the 
ignition timing and particularly the valve operation.) 

Two Cycle Engine. 




43—How many types or kinds of two-cycle engines are there in general use? 


Name them.757 

44— What is the “twoport” type adapted for?.*.757 

45— What is the “three-port” type adapted for?.757 

46— What is the ‘two and three port” type adapted for?.757 

47— Why is a two-cycle engine called a “valveless”tvpe of engine?.757 

48— How many strokes of piston are there to the four operations of intake, exhaust, 

compression and explosion?.757 

49— How many strokes of piston are there to the same operation on a four-cycle 

type engine?.. .757, 58 

50— What type engine is shown in figs. 1 and 2, on page 756?. 756 

51— What is occurring in engine, fig. 1?.756 

52— What is occurring in engine, fig. 2?.756 


































107 

53— What is a baffle plate for?.756 

54— Does exhaust port open slightly before inlet port?.756 

54a-If inlet and exhaust ports are open at the same time, what would prevent the 

fresh charge from passing out the exhaust port with the exhaust gases?.756 

55— Explain the action of a mixing valve used on a two-cycle engine?.756 

56— Explain the action of a carburetor used on a “two-port” type engine.756 

57— Is a vacuum formed in crank case when piston travels up?....756 

58— Does the vacuum thus formed create a suction and cause the gas to be drawn 

into crank case?.756 

59— Where is the gas drawn from?.756 

60— How is the gas then admitted into cylinder?.756 

61— After explosion stroke, state how and when the gas passes out the exhaust 

port.756 

62— What opens and closes the exhaust port?.756 

63— Does the exhaust port open slightly before the inlet port? How?.756 

Stationary Internal Combustion Engine. 

64— Does the stationary type of internal combustion engine usually operate on the 

four-cycle principle?.757 

65— Is the stroke usually larger than the bore?.757 

66— What is the speed of a stationary engine?.757 

67— Is the speed constant?.757 

68— What device keeps the speed constant?.757 

69— State the two types of governors generally used on stationary engines.757 

70— Explain the difference between the “throttling” type governor and the “hit 

and miss” type.757 

71— Explain the principle and action of the governor on the engine, fig. 20.757 

72— What type of ignition is generally used on the stationary engine?.757 

73— Explain the action of the “wipe spark”.215 

74— How is the exhaust valve operated on the engine, fig. 3?.... 757 

75— How is the exhaust valve operated on the engine, fig. 20?.757 

76— Is the exhaust valve held open by governor action on engine, fig. 20? When, 

and for what purpose?.757 

77 — Are inlet valves sometimes of the “automatic type” on stationary engines?.. .757 

78— What is meant by an “automatic inlet valve”?. 91 

79— What kinds of fuel can be used on stationary engines?. 757 

g 0 —When kerosene is used, must it be heated?.*.757 

Diesel Engine. 

81—Briefly explain the principle of the Diesel engine. 758 

g2—What part is the injection valve, and what purpose does it serve?.758 

83 — what operates the injection valve?.758 

84— What is the air admission valve (A) for?.758 

85 — What is the exhaust valve (E) for?.758 

86— During the admission or inlet stroke, is cylinder filled with air only?.758 

87_During compression stroke is this air compressed to about 500 pounds per 

square inch, and does this produce a higher temperature?.758 

88— When piston reaches upper end of the compression stroke is fuel then 

admitted? . 758 

89— Is the fuel oil pumped into the space around the valve spindle?.758 







































108 

90— Is the air for fuel injection admitted behind the oil, to blow the oil into the 

cylinder when valve opens?. 7 ^ 8 

90a-Is this injection air supplied by separate air compressor, driven from engine 

shaft?. 7 ^ 8 

90b-What ignites the gas?. 758 

91— Briefly explain the action of the power stroke.758 

92— How is the quantity of fuel governed?.. 758 

93— When does the exhaust valve open?.758 

Gas Producer. 

94— Explain what is meant by a gas producer.757 

95— What is the gas thus produced used for?.757 

96— Name the two types.757 

M iscellaneous. 

97— What is a “service” car for?.759 

(Read pages 759, 760, 761, 762.) 

Steam Car. 

(Questions will not be asked on this subject. Read pages 763, 764, 765 and details of 
a steam car will no doubt be understood.) 

FORD SUPPLEMENT. 

(The student is not required to answer questions under this subject unless he so 
desires.) 

(Read pages 766 and note location of parts. Read data on page 770.) 

1— What part of a Ford is the Chassis?.770 

2— State the different “units” the Ford Chassis is divided, into.770 

3— Is it well to remember these units when repairing?.770 

4— Before starting engine, what is necessary to do?.771 

5— What does the hand lever do when it is pulled back?.771 

6 — How would you retard the spark lever?.771 

7 — where is spark lever placed., and what movement retards, and what move¬ 
ment advances the spark?.771, 805 

8 — What does spark lever connect with?.805 

9— Where is the throttle lever placed, and what does it connect with?... .771, 799 

10— Where is the spark lever placed for starting?.771 

11— Where is the ignition switch located?.771 

12— Where is it placed when starting and running?.771 

13— How would you prime the carburetor for easy starting?.771,798 

14— Is there a dash adjustment for the carburetor, and where is it located?... .798 

15— Suppose engine is difficult to start, state briefly procedure in starting it...798 

16— Briefly state how you would crank a Ford engine.771 

17— After engine is started, how would you start car?.771 

18— Briefly state how you would reverse car.771 

19— Briefly state how you would stop car.771 

20— Briefly state how the speed of car is controlled.771 

21— When running where would, you place spark lever?.771 

22— When running where would you place throttle lever?.771 

23— When should spark be retarded while running?.771 


































109 

24— How is oil put into engine?.772 

25— When engine is new, how much oil would you put into crank case?.772 

26— After engine has been limbered up, how much oil should there be in crank 

case?.772 

27— How should you test the oil level?.772 

28— Briefly explain the principle of oiling the engine (see splash system, semi- 

circulating) .197 

29— What kind of oil is recommended, for use in engine?.772 

30— Should graphite ever be used in a Ford engine? Why not?.772 

31— How should you proceed to drain the oil?.772 

(Read the other parts of page 772 carefully.) 

Ford Steering. 

32— Briefly explain how the Ford front wheels are steered and the parts that 

constitute the steering system.773 

33— Instead of having gears at the bottom of the steering post, where are they 

located, and what is at the bottom of steering post?.773 

34— What purpose do the steering reduction gears serve?.773 

35— What is the pinion (B, fig. 8 ) connected with?.773 

36— Is the steering rod fitted with a flange, and are there three small gears mounted 

on studs on this flange?.773 

37— Then when steering wheel is moved the steering rod is also moved, but 

through the movement of the three gears, is it not?.773 

38— How can you gain access to these gears?.773 

39— How can the steering wheel be removed?.773 

40— How would you tighten steering gear?.773 

41— If ball and socket, which is placed on rod A and B, fig. 9, becomes worn from 

lack of oil, how would you take up on the wear?.773 

42— What part is the “spindle arm”?.-773 

43— Are there bushings in these spindle arms?.773 

44— How would you remove the bushings?.773 

45— How would you fit a new bushing?.773,792 

46— How would you proceed to remove the front wheels?.774 

47— How would you proceed to test the front wheels?.774 

48— How would you proceed to adjust the front wheel bearings?.774 

49 — How would you proceed to remove the front axle?.774 

50— What is meant by “transposing tires”?.774 

51— What care should the front springs receive?.774 

52 — What is meant by “alignment of the wheels”?.774,683 

53 — How would you proceed to align the front wheels?.774 

Ford Transmission. 

54 — How does the Ford transmission differ from a gear type transmission?.775 

55 — ;where is the Ford transmission mounted?. 775 

56 — Where is the Ford clutch located?. 775 

57 — How many speeds “forward” does a Ford transmission give?. 77 5 

58 — How many speeds “reverse” does a Ford transmission give?. 775 

59 — where are the “planetary gears” located?. 775 

6 0— Where is the “reverse drum” located?. 775 

6 1— Where is the “slow speed drum” located?. 775 

62— Where is the “brake drum” located?. 775 










































110 


63— Where are the “steel disks” of clutch located?.775 

64— Where is the “ring” which presses against the steel disks located.?.775 

65— For what purpose are the “fingers” which press against the ring?.775 

66 — For what purpose is the “collar” which shifting yoke works in?.775 

67— For what purpose is the “spring”?. .775 

68 — For what purpose is the adjustment screw for clutch?.775 

69— Are bands placed around the “reverse drum,” “slow speed drum” and “brake 

drum”?..775 

70— Is foot pedal (B-) connected, with brake drum band, and what action takes 

place when the foot brake pedal is depressed?.777 

71— Is clutch foot pedal (c) connected with the slow speed band, and when 

depressed full forward,, does this tighten the slow speed band?.777 

72— Is clutch foot pedal (c) also connected with clutch? How?.777 

73— When clutch pedal (c) is allowed to come part way back, does this cause 

spring to release its tension on clutch? How?.777 

74— In starting car off from a standstill, and you wished to start on low gear, 
you would, depress clutch pedal (C) as far forward as it would go, would 
you not?.!. 777 

75— This section would cause spring tension to be taken off clutch and slow speed 
would be tightened, and car would start off on slow speed. Is this correct?. .777 

76— What position would “side hand lever” be in during this operation?. 777 

77— Is the spring tension off from the clutch when side hand lever is in center 

vertical position?. 777 

78— Then to throw on “high gear,” after starting on “low gear,” is the clutch 

pedal released and side hand lever thrown full forward?. 777 

79— When side hand lever is thrown full forward, does this action cause eccentric 

(C) to move from under screw (B), thus permitting clutch spring tension to 

be applied to the clutch fingers, which press against clutch push ring, and 

cause the clutch disks to take hold, and is car then in “high gear”?_ 777,775 

(Study the action of the hand lever in relation to the eccentric (C) and screw (B) 
on page 777, and fig. 15A, page 776 and page 775.) 

80— At the same time the clutch pedal is pushed forward, the side hand lever 

should also be pushed forward as far as it will go, so that when clutch pedal 
is released the high speed clutch is engaged. Is this correct?.!. 777, 775 

81— Does “neutral” position mean when clutch spring tension is off of the clutch, 
and none of the bands on the drum are tightened? Yes. 

82— Would “neutral” position be when side hand lever was in vertical position, 
or clutch pedal (C) was half way depressed? Yes. 

83— Then when brake pedal is depressed and foot brake is applied, the clutch 
pedal should be in “neutral.” Is this correct? Yes. 

84— When hand lever is in back position, is spring tension released by the eccen¬ 


tric (C) and screw (B), and are brakes on rear wheels tightened?.777 

85— If machine had a tendency to cree'p forward when cranking engine, what 

would likely be the cause?. 770 

86 — If clutch “slips,” what would likely be the trouble?.776 

87— If clutch “drags,” what w'ould likely be the trouble?.776 

88 — What kind of oil should be used in the Ford engine and transmission to 

prevent dragging of clutch?.. 

89— How would you proceed to adjust the clutch fingers?. 770 

90— How is the transmission supported at the rear?. 770 

























Ill 


91—When a transmission becomes very noisy is it probably due to the bush¬ 
ings in the second speed and reverse drums being worn, then what is 


advisable to do?.776 

92— How would you proceed to remove transmission?.776 

93— When transmission band linings are worn, what is the result?..777 

94— State the evidence of worn transmission bands...777 

95— How would you drive a Ford to protect the bands?.777 

96— How would you proceed to tighten the “brake” and “reverse” bands?.777 

97— Should the bands be adjusted so they will not drag?.777 

98— How would you proceed to tighten the “slow speed” band?.777 

99— What size band linings are there used?.777 

100— State procedure in removing transmission cover.778 

101— State procedure in removing bands.778 

102— What is the proper method of relining the bands, and is it similar to relining 

brake bands? . . . ..778, 688 

103— What kind of rivets should be used?.778 

104— How would you proceed to install the bands after relining?.778 

105— Briefly state how you would proceed to replace transmission cover.778 

106— Is it necessary to adjust bands again (after installing new ones) after run¬ 
ning a couple of hundred miles?.778 




Ford Transmission Assembly. 

107— What do figures 19 to 19G, on page 779, represent?.778 

108— How many small disks are there in the clutch?.778 

109— How many large disks are there in the clutch?.778 

110— How are they assembled?. ( .778 

111— What do the projections on the small plates (20D, page 779) fit into?.778 

112— Is the disk drum attached to the transmission shaft?.778 

113— What do the slots in the large plates or disks fit into?.778 ' 

114— How is the “clutch disk drum” fastened to the transmission shaft?.778 


H5—what causes the large and small disks to grasp, and how is this adjustment 


regulated?.778 

116—Do the transmission shaft (TS) and small plates (20D) run free in the brake 


drum?.778 

H 7 —what does the “slow speed drum” fit over?.778 

118— How is the “driven gear” fastened to hollow shaft?.778 

119— What are the “triple gears” for?.778 

120— Are they fastened together in- groups of three?.778 

121— Should they revolve freely and on what?.778 

123— What does gear (P) mesh with?.778 

122— What does gear (K) mesh with?.778 

124 — What does gear (PI) mesh with?.778 

125 _in assembling the groups (20 to 20C), in what position is the brake drum 


placed?. 

126— How is the slow speed drum then fitted?. 

127— What is next procedure?. 

128— Where are the Woodruff keys placed?.. 

129 — How is the “driven gear” placed?. 

130— Should the “triple gears” then be meshed, and with what, and how? 

131 — Should the “triple gears” be tied with a string? Why?. 

132— What is the second procedure?. 


779 

779 

779 

779 

779 

779 

779 

779 











































112 


Fitting the Ford Clutch. 

133— State procedure of fitting the clutch. 779 

134— How would you arrange the “clutch disks”?. 779 

135— Where would the “thrust plate” be when all disks are assembled?.779 

136— Where and how is the “clutch push ring” placed?. 779 

137— How would you proceed to place the “driving plate”?.779 

138— How would you test to see if the “clutch disks” move freely?.779 

139— Briefly state how you would proceed to assemble the clutch spring parts...779 

140— Should the adjusting screws (AS) be adjusted?.779 

Ford Rear Axle and Parts. 

141— In how many parts is the axle housing made?.780 

142— Is the drive shaft enclosed? In what?.780 

143— Where and how is the drive shaft supported?. 780 

144— Is the entire rear axle and drive shaft removed in one unit when repairs are 

to be made?. 7 ^ 9 

145— State how you would proceed to remove rear axle.780 

140 —state how you would disconnect universal joint.•.780 

147 —state how you would disassemble rear axle.780 

14 g—state how you would remove axle shafts.780 

149— State how you would remove drive pinion .780 

150— State how you would remove differential gears.781,782 

151— State how you would remove rear wheels.,.-781 

152— Where are the cast-iron brake shoes located?.781 

153— How would you proceed to replace brake shoes?.781 

154— How would you equalize the pull on the rear hub brakes?.*..781 

155— Where is the driving shaft bushing located?.•.781 

156— What is the cause of excess of oil in the brakes and how is it remedied?-782 

157— State the cause of grease leaks from rear axle.782 

158 — What is the result if thrust washers are worn?.782 

159— Where is thrust washer located in differential housing?(see fig f 28)..781 

Ford Power Plant. 

100 —is the engine and transmission in one unit?.783 

161— State the specifications of the power plant.783 

162— State location of valves?.783 

163— Is the cylinder head detachable?.783 

164— Are cylinders cast “en-bloc”?.783 

165— What cooling system is used?..783 

100 —what is the source of electric current for ignition?.783 

167— What make of carburetors are there used?.783 

168— What kind of transmission is used and does entire transmission revolve 

when on high gear?...783 

169— Is the gasoline fed by gravity?.783 

170— What kind of engine lubrication system is used?.783 

(Read page 783, “Removing Power Plant.”) 

171— Is the crankshaft a regular 180° four-cylinder type?.784 

172 — What is the “firing order” of the Ford engine?.784 

173— How many cams are there on camshaft? (footnote)...784 










































113 


174— What is the speed of camshaft?.784 

175— How many teeth has camshaft gear?.784 

176— How many teeth has crankshaft gear?.784 

(Note name of parts on page 784.) 

Ford Valve Timing. 

177— When does inlet valve open?.785 

178— When does inlet valve close? .785 

179— When does exhaust valve open? .785 

180— When does exhaust valve close? .785 

181— How would you proceed to obtain proper “valve clearance”?.785 

182— How would you proceed to check the valve-timing?.785 

183— How would you proceed to time the valves?.785 

184— How would you proceed to mesh the timing gears?.785 

Ford Engine Connecting Rods. 

185— What is the result of loose connecting rod hearings?.786 

186— What are some of the causes of loose connecting rod bearings?.786 

187— Is it necessary to drain oil from base to make repairs on connecting rods?. .786 

188— How would you proceed to adjust connecting rod bearings?.786 

189— How would you test for tightness?.786 

190— Should each bearing be fitted and tested before tightening all the cap bolts?.786 

191— After adjusting the bearings what should be done?.786 

192— How would proceed to remove No. 4 connecting rod cap?.786 

193— How would you remove piston and connecting rod?.786 

194— How would you remove lower crank case cover?.786 

Ford Engine Main Bearings. 

195— How is a worn main bearing detected?.787 

196— What are the causes of worn main bearings?.787 

197— Does the rear main bearing usually wear first? Why?. 787 

198— How can you detect if rear main bearing is worn?.787 

199— Can rear main bearing be tightened without removing engine?.787 

200— How would you proceed to remove the center and front main bearing?.787 

201— How would you proceed to remove cylinder head?.787 

202— Briefly state the first, second, third, fourth and fifth procedure for adjusting 

the bearings.-. 787 

Ford Engine Crankshaft and Camshaft. 

203— How would you proceed to remove crankshaft?.788 

204— How would you proceed to remove camshaft?.788 

205— How would you proceed to install new push rods?.788 

Overheating of Ford Engine. 

206— Read page 788 carefully and then briefly state causes of engine overheating..788 

207— If water becomes frozen in radiator, does it usually freeze at the bottom 

first?. ; 788 

208— Is this because water comes from top of engine to top of radiator, and is 
then cooled as it passes through radiator? Yes. 

209_State how you would proceed to thaw out frozen radiator.788 


































114 


Ford Radiator. 

210— How would, you proceed to clean a radiator?.789 

211— When removing a radiator should the lower hose be left on?.789 

212— How would you test a radiator for a leak?.789 

Ford Engine Troubles. 

(Read bottom of page 800 carefully.) 

213— If compression is poor and rings fit well, what may be the cause?.790 

214— How would you proceed to remove valves for grinding?.790 

215— How would you proceed to grinu the valves?.790 

216— When valve seat is worn badly what is advisable to do?.790 

217— If valves fail to seat properly, what may be the cause?.790 

218— What is the result of weak valve springs?.790 

219— How can you detect a weak valve spring?.790 

220— State at least five reasons for cause of knocks..790 

221— How would you proceed to remove carbon deposit from cylinder and piston 

head?.790 

222— State procedure in replacing cylinder head. 790 

223— When are oversize valve-stems necessary?.791 

224— What is a “valve guide reamer” for?.791 

225— What is a “valve seat reamer” for?.791 

226— Can Ford valves be enlarged?.791 

227— What is a “valve refacer” for?.791 

228— What are “valve clearance adjusters” for?.791 

Ford Pistons and Rings. 

229— What are Ford Pistons made of?.792 

230— What is the diameter?.792 

231— What kind of piston pin is there used?.,.792 

232— What diameter of oversize pistons can there be obtained?.-.792 

233 — How many rings are there and where are they placed and what are the 

measurements?.792 

234— Are the rings of the “eccentric” type?..792 

235— When oversize pistons and rings are fitted moist cylinders be rebored or 

reamed?.,.792 

236— What size is a standard oversize piston for a Ford engine? (foot-note).792 

237— What is an “aligning reamer” for?...792 

238— How much allowance or clearance is there allowed for crankshaft wear?.. ..792 

239— What parts of a Ford car can other reamers be used for?.792 

240— If cylinders are over-lubricated, what is the result?.793 

241— What are some of the causes of over-lubrication?..793 

242— How would you detect a broken piston ring?.793 

243— How would you remedy “piston pumping oil”?.793 

244— Should “chamfering” of the rings be tried before drilling a piston?.793 

245— What is meant by “piston clearance” and how much clearance is there on a 

Ford piston?. v .793 

246— What is meant by “increasing compression” and is it advisable?.793 

247— What results from increasing compression?.793 

248— What is meant by “running-in” an engine and when is it necessary?.793 

249— Are the special wrenches shown on page 795 time-savers?.795 










































115 


Ford Gaskets. 

250— State where gaskets are used on a Ford.796 

251— State where felt washers are used.796 

252— What kind, of a gasket is used between the cylinder and cylinder head?.796 

253— Should shellac be used on this gasket? Why not?.796 

254— Must cylinder head be kept tight? Why?.796 

255— Could asbestos be used for a cylinder head gasket?.796 

256— If cylinder head cap screw threads become stripped, what is advisable to do?.796 
(Read pages 796. 797, carefully.) 

Ford Carburetlon. 

257— Name the two makes of carburetors used on a Ford.798,160 

258— What is the “dash adjustment” for and state its operation?.798,802 

259— Briefly state how you would regulate this carburetor adjustment.798 

(Read paragraphs on “Starting Engine in Cold Weather”; “To Facilitate Easy 
Starting”; “Float Level Adjustment of Kingston,” page 798.) 

(Read carefully the Construction, Principle of Operation and Troubles and Remedies 
of Carburetor, on page 799.) 

260— Is it advisable to heat the “mixture” of a carburetor as it enters the cylinder, 

as well as the “air” taken into carburetor?.I 60 

261— What is a “Pitot tube”?. 800 

262— Is this principle applied to the Schebler carburetor on page 800?.800 

(Read carefully page 800 and note the principle of a “Plain Tube Carburetor,” as it 

is a principle now in general use on many cars.) 

263— What is the purpose and principle of an• “auxiliary air valve”?....801 

(Read page 802 carefully.) 

Ford Ignition. 

264_Make a rough sketch showing the wiring of primary and secondary circuits 

used on the Ford. 

265— How many “coil units” are there and where are they placed?.803 

266— Briefly state path of primary circuit. 803 

267— Briefly state path of secondary circuit. 803 

268— Explain the principle and construction of the commutator.803,805 

269— At what speed (relative to crankshaft • speed.) does the commutator roller 

revolve?. 

270— What is the commutator roller attached to?. 805 

271— How many contact points are there on the commutator?.805 

272— Make a sketch showing how you would connect same with spark plugs.803 

273— What parts of commutator are most likely to get out of order?.804 

274— How does cold weather affect the commutator?. 804 

275— How would you remove commutator?.. 804 

276— state some of the commutator troubles.. .. 804 

277_How would you detect a short-circuit in the commutator wiring?.804 

278—How is the spark advanced or retarded?....•,.‘ 7 ’ 7 .' ‘ 8 ° 5 

279_How would you proceed to set the time of spark on a Ford engine ignition 

, „ .804,316 

system?. 

Ford Magneto. 

280— Does the magneto supply current tor Ignition, lights and horn?.805 

281— Are the magnets called the “rotating fields’ .. 

282— How many magnets are there?. 


































116 

283—Do the magnets revolve in front of the coils, how close or what clear¬ 


ance? . 805,807 

284— What are magnets attached to? (see fig. 86).803 

285— How many coils are there?.805 

286— Are these coils called the “stationary armature” and why?.805 

287— What are these coils attached to?.805 

288— How are the coils wound?.....-.805 

289— What are ends of coils connected to?.805 

290— Is the electric current generated, alternating?..80» 

(See page 265 for principle of Ford magneto.) 

291— What does voltage vary from?....80® 

292— How are the magnet poles placed; are like poles (N&N and S&S) together?.80!? 

293— State cause of weak magnets.805 

294— State indications of weak magnets.806 


(Read page 808, “Testing for Grounds”; read pages 806, 807, on “Practical Pointers 
on the Repair of Ford Magneto.”) 

(Read pages 807, 808, on “Remagnetizing Ford Magnets”; read “Ignition Troubles” 
carefully, on page 808; read miscellaneous matter on pages 809 to 825.) 

AIRPLANE SUPPLEMENT. 

There are no questions to this instruction but it is advisable for the student to 
read the subject carefully and take particular notice of the difference between 
an automobile engine and an airplane engine. 

Also note the overhead, camshaft drive systems so commonly used on airplane 
engines and further note the double valve system (dual valves) on page 927, as 
used on the Pierce Arrow automobile engine. 

The matter referring to airplane ignition is also of value to the student, espe¬ 
cially magnetos for airplane engines. 

LIBERTY ENGINE SUPPLEMENT. 

There are no questions to this instruction but the student is advised to read it 
carefully. 


% 


t 













LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 




























CADMIUM TEST OUTFIT 

FOR A STORAGE BATTERY 

The condition of a storage battery is 
usually ascertained by taking a specific gravity 
reading of the electrolyte, with a hydrometer. A 
reading of 1,275 or above being usually considered 
as indicating a fully charged cell. 

While specific gravity readings with a hydro¬ 
meter should always be made, yet they should 
not be relied upon entirely. 

For instance, a battery which gaveentirely 
satisfactory hydrometer tests, may show a 
rapid drop in voltage when in use, yet this con¬ 
dition could not be foretold by hydrometer read¬ 
ings alone, because the hydrometer readings 
would not tell us the condition of either the posi¬ 
tive or negative plates, and it is their condition 
which determines amount of energy in battery. 

We may also take a voltage reading of the 
entire battery, while current is being drawn 
from the battery which gave satisfactory hydro¬ 
meter readings. This would tell us if the plates 
were not in good condition, but it would not tell 
us which set of plates was at fault, because the 
voltage reading includes all positive and negative 
plates. 

If we took a voltage reading of one cell, 
while battery is on charge, you can readily see 
that the test includes both positive and negative 
plates. Suppose the battery will not take a full 
charge, which set of plates is defective? 

Therefore, to determine the condition of the positive and negative 
plates separately, we must make a test between each set of plates and some 
neutral substance. Theoretically, a number of substances could be used for the 
neutral substance, but for practical reasons Cadmium is used. 

Cadmium is a metal, it looks like zinc, but is pure because there is no 
other substance mixed with it. 

A Cadmium Testing outfit consists of two copper test points, one of 

which has a stick of Cadmium, about 3 \" long and di., riveted to it, as per 
fig. 1, and a special reading voltmeter, per fig. 2. 

You will readily see that the advantage of the Cadmium Testing Outfit 
will soon pay for itself, as it will enable you to know which set of plates of a 
battery require cleaning or replacement and you can go right to the source of 
trouble without having to take entire battery apart. 

If a battery will not hold its charge, or looses its charge quickly in use, 

the Cadmium test will tell you instantly where the trouble is. 

If you propose doing battery repair work, you can turn out better work 
because you should never let a battery go out of your place unless the hydro¬ 
meter readings are from 1.275 to 1.300; until the positive-to-Cadmium tests give 
at least 2.40 volts, and the negatives-to-Cadmium test gives about 0.175 volts. 

PRICE 

Complete Outfit, packed in a convenient case with complete instructions in¬ 
cluding Voltmeter and Cadmium Test Points and Cables, per figs. 1 and 2, $ 25.00 
Voltmeter, per fig. 2, only $22.50—Cadmium Leads per fig. 1 , only $3.25. 

Address A. L. Dyke, Elect. Dept., Granite Bldg., St. Louis, Mo. 



Fig. 1. Test Points and Cadmium 



Fig. 2. The Special Cadmium Test 
Voltmeter 

























A COMPLETE ELECTRICAL TESTING OUTFIT 


Weston Model 280 Gar¬ 
age Testing Volt-Ammeter. 

It is complete with full in¬ 
structions, showing how to 
make all tests. 

It will prove of invalu¬ 
able assistance to employees in 
any garage. This instrument 
is extremely accurate and ser¬ 
viceable, perfectly deadbeat, 
quick in action, shielded from 
the disturbing influence of 
external magnetic fields, ex¬ 
ceptionally permanent and 
durable. 

It has six ranges as fol¬ 
lows : 30 volts, 3 volts and .1 volt 
(100 milli-volts); 300 amperes, 
30 amperes and 3 amperes. 
The 30 volt range is use¬ 
ful for determining the voltage of the starting or lighting system of batteries. 
The 3 volt range is of service in testing the individual storage batteries. 
The 100 mslli-volt range may be used to determine the “drop” over seg¬ 
ments of the commutator of the motor or generator. 

The3 ampere rangeisofvalueintestingthecurrentrequiredby single lights. 
The 30 ampere range will denote the current required by a complete light¬ 
ing circuit or the magnitude of leaks. 

The 300 ampere range is useful to determine the starting current. 

The foregoing are merely a few of the tests that may be made with the 
instrument. 

A book of instructions is furnished with the instrument showing how to 
make practically any electrical test on lighting and starting systems. Cautions 
are also given in order to prevent accidental damage to the instument while 
making tests, each $32.50. 

With leather carry-case, provided with sling strap, to contain instrument 
and shunts, extra $4.40. 



WESTON VOLT AND AMMETER—Separate 



These smaller instruments were primarily 
designed for use on the dash board but some¬ 
times are mounted on a slanting base for ordin¬ 
ary test work. 

For instance, the Ammeter can be used for 
testing the amount of current flowing to the bat¬ 
tery from the generator, or the quantity of cur¬ 
rent consumed by the lights, horn, ignition, etc. 

• The Voltmeter can be used to test the volt¬ 
age of the battery, generator, and for other tests. 

Model 301, Weston direct current Am¬ 
meter can be secured in either of the following 
readings on dial, with zero in the center, or to 
the left, and the ranges can be had for either, 
3-0-3, 15-0-15, 30-0-30 amperes. Price $6.90. 

Model 301, Weston Voltmeter for direct 
current can be secured with the zero to the left of dial and with either of the 
readings as follows: 0 to 3, 0 to 15, 0 to 25, 0 to 30 volts. Price $6.90. 

NOTE: Advise if we can substitute a different reading from what you order providing we do not 
have meter with reading ordered in stock, or if you will allow sufficient time to secure same from factory. 


Illustration showing the Weston 
center zero reading, 30-0-30, 
Model 301 Ammeter. 


Address A. L. Dyke, Elect. Dept., Granite Bldg., St. Louis, Mo. 
















